ZA200004085B - Multivalent agonists, partial agonists and antagonists of the GABA receptors. - Google Patents
Multivalent agonists, partial agonists and antagonists of the GABA receptors. Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- ZA200004085B ZA200004085B ZA200004085A ZA200004085A ZA200004085B ZA 200004085 B ZA200004085 B ZA 200004085B ZA 200004085 A ZA200004085 A ZA 200004085A ZA 200004085 A ZA200004085 A ZA 200004085A ZA 200004085 B ZA200004085 B ZA 200004085B
- Authority
- ZA
- South Africa
- Prior art keywords
- substituted
- ligand
- compound
- linkers
- ligands
- Prior art date
Links
- 239000000556 agonist Substances 0.000 title claims description 76
- 102000005915 GABA Receptors Human genes 0.000 title claims description 61
- 108010005551 GABA Receptors Proteins 0.000 title claims description 61
- 239000005557 antagonist Substances 0.000 title claims description 48
- 239000004031 partial agonist Substances 0.000 title claims description 44
- 239000003446 ligand Substances 0.000 claims description 527
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 claims description 442
- 125000005647 linker group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 376
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 claims description 224
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims description 118
- -1 carboxylic acid halides Chemical class 0.000 claims description 91
- BTCSSZJGUNDROE-UHFFFAOYSA-N gamma-aminobutyric acid Chemical compound NCCCC(O)=O BTCSSZJGUNDROE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 72
- 125000003118 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 71
- 102000005962 receptors Human genes 0.000 claims description 69
- 108020003175 receptors Proteins 0.000 claims description 69
- 125000000392 cycloalkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 68
- 229960003692 gamma aminobutyric acid Drugs 0.000 claims description 66
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 claims description 60
- 125000000524 functional group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 56
- 125000001072 heteroaryl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 53
- 125000000753 cycloalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 50
- 125000000623 heterocyclic group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 50
- 239000003814 drug Substances 0.000 claims description 49
- 125000000217 alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 48
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 claims description 43
- 125000000547 substituted alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 40
- 150000003839 salts Chemical class 0.000 claims description 39
- 125000002947 alkylene group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 38
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 claims description 34
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 claims description 33
- 239000008194 pharmaceutical composition Substances 0.000 claims description 32
- 125000005346 substituted cycloalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 32
- 125000004450 alkenylene group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 29
- 150000001412 amines Chemical class 0.000 claims description 29
- 241000124008 Mammalia Species 0.000 claims description 24
- 125000003342 alkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 24
- 125000004419 alkynylene group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 24
- 125000000304 alkynyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 23
- 125000005724 cycloalkenylene group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 23
- 208000019901 Anxiety disease Diseases 0.000 claims description 22
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 22
- 125000005017 substituted alkenyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 22
- 206010047700 Vomiting Diseases 0.000 claims description 21
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 claims description 21
- 229940125425 inverse agonist Drugs 0.000 claims description 20
- 150000003573 thiols Chemical class 0.000 claims description 20
- 230000036506 anxiety Effects 0.000 claims description 19
- 239000002243 precursor Substances 0.000 claims description 19
- 125000003178 carboxy group Chemical group [H]OC(*)=O 0.000 claims description 18
- 125000000449 nitro group Chemical group [O-][N+](*)=O 0.000 claims description 18
- 230000000949 anxiolytic effect Effects 0.000 claims description 16
- 150000002431 hydrogen Chemical class 0.000 claims description 16
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 claims description 16
- 125000004426 substituted alkynyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 16
- 238000011282 treatment Methods 0.000 claims description 16
- 125000000732 arylene group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 14
- 125000005549 heteroarylene group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 13
- 125000004429 atom Chemical group 0.000 claims description 12
- 125000002993 cycloalkylene group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 12
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 claims description 12
- 230000009257 reactivity Effects 0.000 claims description 12
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 11
- 239000003937 drug carrier Substances 0.000 claims description 10
- VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-M Chloride anion Chemical compound [Cl-] VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 claims description 9
- 230000002209 hydrophobic effect Effects 0.000 claims description 9
- 230000000147 hypnotic effect Effects 0.000 claims description 8
- 230000001404 mediated effect Effects 0.000 claims description 8
- 230000002708 enhancing effect Effects 0.000 claims description 7
- 150000004820 halides Chemical class 0.000 claims description 7
- 230000010287 polarization Effects 0.000 claims description 7
- 208000012902 Nervous system disease Diseases 0.000 claims description 6
- 150000002148 esters Chemical class 0.000 claims description 6
- 125000000391 vinyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])=C([H])[H] 0.000 claims description 6
- 208000025966 Neurological disease Diseases 0.000 claims description 5
- 206010039897 Sedation Diseases 0.000 claims description 5
- 150000001299 aldehydes Chemical class 0.000 claims description 5
- 239000001961 anticonvulsive agent Substances 0.000 claims description 5
- 239000012948 isocyanate Substances 0.000 claims description 5
- 150000002513 isocyanates Chemical class 0.000 claims description 5
- 238000004949 mass spectrometry Methods 0.000 claims description 5
- 201000009570 retrograde amnesia Diseases 0.000 claims description 5
- 230000036280 sedation Effects 0.000 claims description 5
- 229920002554 vinyl polymer Polymers 0.000 claims description 5
- UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen Chemical compound [H][H] UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 4
- 230000002378 acidificating effect Effects 0.000 claims description 4
- 150000001298 alcohols Chemical class 0.000 claims description 4
- 230000001773 anti-convulsant effect Effects 0.000 claims description 4
- 229960003965 antiepileptics Drugs 0.000 claims description 4
- 150000001735 carboxylic acids Chemical class 0.000 claims description 4
- 150000002576 ketones Chemical class 0.000 claims description 4
- 238000004895 liquid chromatography mass spectrometry Methods 0.000 claims description 4
- 238000004262 preparative liquid chromatography Methods 0.000 claims description 4
- 150000008064 anhydrides Chemical class 0.000 claims description 3
- 125000005621 boronate group Chemical class 0.000 claims description 3
- 125000002577 pseudohalo group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 3
- 239000000932 sedative agent Substances 0.000 claims description 3
- LMBFAGIMSUYTBN-MPZNNTNKSA-N teixobactin Chemical compound C([C@H](C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@H](CCC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@H]([C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@H]1C(N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H](C[C@@H]2NC(=N)NC2)C(=O)N[C@H](C(=O)O[C@H]1C)[C@@H](C)CC)=O)NC)C1=CC=CC=C1 LMBFAGIMSUYTBN-MPZNNTNKSA-N 0.000 claims description 3
- 208000000044 Amnesia Diseases 0.000 claims description 2
- 208000031091 Amnestic disease Diseases 0.000 claims description 2
- 230000006986 amnesia Effects 0.000 claims description 2
- 230000001624 sedative effect Effects 0.000 claims description 2
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 claims 9
- 206010010904 Convulsion Diseases 0.000 claims 7
- 239000003179 convulsant agent Substances 0.000 claims 6
- 125000001475 halogen functional group Chemical group 0.000 claims 6
- 239000002555 ionophore Substances 0.000 claims 1
- 230000000236 ionophoric effect Effects 0.000 claims 1
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 167
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 133
- 239000012043 crude product Substances 0.000 description 131
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 113
- ZMXDDKWLCZADIW-UHFFFAOYSA-N N,N-Dimethylformamide Chemical compound CN(C)C=O ZMXDDKWLCZADIW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 109
- 230000027455 binding Effects 0.000 description 89
- 238000004809 thin layer chromatography Methods 0.000 description 73
- 238000004128 high performance liquid chromatography Methods 0.000 description 71
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 68
- 238000000746 purification Methods 0.000 description 67
- HEMHJVSKTPXQMS-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium hydroxide Chemical compound [OH-].[Na+] HEMHJVSKTPXQMS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 47
- HPALAKNZSZLMCH-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium;chloride;hydrate Chemical compound O.[Na+].[Cl-] HPALAKNZSZLMCH-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 45
- LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethanol Chemical compound CCO LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 41
- 239000012298 atmosphere Substances 0.000 description 40
- 239000012044 organic layer Substances 0.000 description 38
- 125000002496 methyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 37
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 36
- 229940049706 benzodiazepine Drugs 0.000 description 35
- WYURNTSHIVDZCO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tetrahydrofuran Chemical compound C1CCOC1 WYURNTSHIVDZCO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 34
- 229940079593 drug Drugs 0.000 description 34
- 150000001557 benzodiazepines Chemical class 0.000 description 32
- 239000000284 extract Substances 0.000 description 32
- 125000001424 substituent group Chemical group 0.000 description 30
- RTZKZFJDLAIYFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Diethyl ether Chemical compound CCOCC RTZKZFJDLAIYFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 29
- RIOQSEWOXXDEQQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N triphenylphosphine Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1P(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 RIOQSEWOXXDEQQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 28
- 241001465754 Metazoa Species 0.000 description 27
- 239000004480 active ingredient Substances 0.000 description 27
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 27
- 241000699670 Mus sp. Species 0.000 description 26
- HJUGFYREWKUQJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetrabromomethane Chemical compound BrC(Br)(Br)Br HJUGFYREWKUQJT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 26
- 125000005309 thioalkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 26
- XEKOWRVHYACXOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethyl acetate Chemical compound CCOC(C)=O XEKOWRVHYACXOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 25
- 241000700159 Rattus Species 0.000 description 25
- 239000000543 intermediate Substances 0.000 description 25
- 229910000104 sodium hydride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 25
- YMWUJEATGCHHMB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dichloromethane Chemical compound ClCCl YMWUJEATGCHHMB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 24
- 125000004432 carbon atom Chemical group C* 0.000 description 24
- KEAYESYHFKHZAL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sodium Chemical compound [Na] KEAYESYHFKHZAL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 19
- 239000012267 brine Substances 0.000 description 19
- 125000002887 hydroxy group Chemical group [H]O* 0.000 description 19
- 239000012312 sodium hydride Substances 0.000 description 19
- JUJWROOIHBZHMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyridine Chemical compound C1=CC=NC=C1 JUJWROOIHBZHMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 18
- 239000011734 sodium Substances 0.000 description 18
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 17
- 238000009472 formulation Methods 0.000 description 17
- 230000001965 increasing effect Effects 0.000 description 16
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 16
- OKKJLVBELUTLKV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methanol Chemical compound OC OKKJLVBELUTLKV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 15
- 125000003545 alkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 15
- 125000005392 carboxamide group Chemical group NC(=O)* 0.000 description 15
- OCJHYHKWUWSHEN-UHFFFAOYSA-N imidazenil Chemical compound NC(=O)C=1N=CN(C2=CC=C(F)C=C22)C=1CN=C2C1=CC=CC=C1Br OCJHYHKWUWSHEN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 15
- 230000000704 physical effect Effects 0.000 description 15
- 239000002904 solvent Substances 0.000 description 15
- 208000037265 diseases, disorders, signs and symptoms Diseases 0.000 description 14
- HQKMJHAJHXVSDF-UHFFFAOYSA-L magnesium stearate Chemical compound [Mg+2].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O.CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O HQKMJHAJHXVSDF-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 14
- 125000006239 protecting group Chemical group 0.000 description 14
- KYTREVLPRJOBEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N triazolo[4,5-i][1,2]benzodiazepine Chemical class C1=CC2=CC=CN=NC2=C2C1=NN=N2 KYTREVLPRJOBEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 14
- SVUOLADPCWQTTE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1h-1,2-benzodiazepine Chemical compound N1N=CC=CC2=CC=CC=C12 SVUOLADPCWQTTE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 13
- 125000002252 acyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 13
- 230000004071 biological effect Effects 0.000 description 13
- 238000001816 cooling Methods 0.000 description 13
- 125000004093 cyano group Chemical group *C#N 0.000 description 13
- 229910052736 halogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 13
- 150000002367 halogens Chemical class 0.000 description 13
- 150000005232 imidazopyridines Chemical class 0.000 description 13
- 239000004615 ingredient Substances 0.000 description 13
- ZAFYATHCZYHLPB-UHFFFAOYSA-N zolpidem Chemical compound N1=C2C=CC(C)=CN2C(CC(=O)N(C)C)=C1C1=CC=C(C)C=C1 ZAFYATHCZYHLPB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 13
- 229960001475 zolpidem Drugs 0.000 description 13
- 125000004423 acyloxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 12
- 125000000266 alpha-aminoacyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 12
- 239000002249 anxiolytic agent Substances 0.000 description 12
- 125000004104 aryloxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 12
- 125000004181 carboxyalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 12
- 125000005553 heteroaryloxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 12
- 125000004470 heterocyclooxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 12
- 239000005457 ice water Substances 0.000 description 12
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 12
- 125000005415 substituted alkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 12
- 102000004300 GABA-A Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 11
- 108090000839 GABA-A Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 11
- 125000004442 acylamino group Chemical group 0.000 description 11
- 229960004538 alprazolam Drugs 0.000 description 11
- VREFGVBLTWBCJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N alprazolam Chemical compound C12=CC(Cl)=CC=C2N2C(C)=NN=C2CN=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 VREFGVBLTWBCJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 11
- 239000003826 tablet Substances 0.000 description 11
- 125000005296 thioaryloxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 11
- 125000005404 thioheteroaryloxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 11
- KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Palladium Chemical compound [Pd] KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 229920002472 Starch Polymers 0.000 description 10
- ZMANZCXQSJIPKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Triethylamine Chemical compound CCN(CC)CC ZMANZCXQSJIPKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 125000000852 azido group Chemical group *N=[N+]=[N-] 0.000 description 10
- 239000003153 chemical reaction reagent Substances 0.000 description 10
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 description 10
- 235000019439 ethyl acetate Nutrition 0.000 description 10
- 230000000144 pharmacologic effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 10
- 235000019698 starch Nutrition 0.000 description 10
- CSCPPACGZOOCGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetone Chemical compound CC(C)=O CSCPPACGZOOCGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 229930194542 Keto Natural products 0.000 description 9
- YXFVVABEGXRONW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Toluene Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC=C1 YXFVVABEGXRONW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 125000000033 alkoxyamino group Chemical group 0.000 description 9
- 238000003556 assay Methods 0.000 description 9
- 229960003529 diazepam Drugs 0.000 description 9
- 239000000539 dimer Substances 0.000 description 9
- 125000002349 hydroxyamino group Chemical group [H]ON([H])[*] 0.000 description 9
- 125000000468 ketone group Chemical group 0.000 description 9
- 125000005255 oxyaminoacyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 9
- UMJSCPRVCHMLSP-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyridine Natural products COC1=CC=CN=C1 UMJSCPRVCHMLSP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 239000008107 starch Substances 0.000 description 9
- 238000003756 stirring Methods 0.000 description 9
- 230000001225 therapeutic effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- 125000005323 thioketone group Chemical group 0.000 description 9
- NQRYJNQNLNOLGT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Piperidine Chemical compound C1CCNCC1 NQRYJNQNLNOLGT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 125000003277 amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 8
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 8
- 210000004556 brain Anatomy 0.000 description 8
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 8
- 238000002512 chemotherapy Methods 0.000 description 8
- AAOVKJBEBIDNHE-UHFFFAOYSA-N diazepam Chemical compound N=1CC(=O)N(C)C2=CC=C(Cl)C=C2C=1C1=CC=CC=C1 AAOVKJBEBIDNHE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 208000035475 disorder Diseases 0.000 description 8
- 239000012259 ether extract Substances 0.000 description 8
- 238000011156 evaluation Methods 0.000 description 8
- UYXAWHWODHRRMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexobarbital Chemical compound O=C1N(C)C(=O)NC(=O)C1(C)C1=CCCCC1 UYXAWHWODHRRMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 229960002456 hexobarbital Drugs 0.000 description 8
- 150000002632 lipids Chemical class 0.000 description 8
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000001575 pathological effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- AYEKOFBPNLCAJY-UHFFFAOYSA-O thiamine pyrophosphate Chemical compound CC1=C(CCOP(O)(=O)OP(O)(O)=O)SC=[N+]1CC1=CN=C(C)N=C1N AYEKOFBPNLCAJY-UHFFFAOYSA-O 0.000 description 8
- DTQVDTLACAAQTR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Trifluoroacetic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C(F)(F)F DTQVDTLACAAQTR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 7
- 150000001732 carboxylic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 7
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 7
- 239000000706 filtrate Substances 0.000 description 7
- 125000005843 halogen group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- 238000001727 in vivo Methods 0.000 description 7
- 235000019359 magnesium stearate Nutrition 0.000 description 7
- 239000012528 membrane Substances 0.000 description 7
- 125000001570 methylene group Chemical group [H]C([H])([*:1])[*:2] 0.000 description 7
- 239000000546 pharmaceutical excipient Substances 0.000 description 7
- 125000002924 primary amino group Chemical group [H]N([H])* 0.000 description 7
- 230000007958 sleep Effects 0.000 description 7
- 239000000725 suspension Substances 0.000 description 7
- VHYFNPMBLIVWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-Dimethylaminopyridine Chemical compound CN(C)C1=CC=NC=C1 VHYFNPMBLIVWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- QOSSAOTZNIDXMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dicylcohexylcarbodiimide Chemical compound C1CCCCC1N=C=NC1CCCCC1 QOSSAOTZNIDXMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrochloric acid Chemical compound Cl VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- WMFOQBRAJBCJND-UHFFFAOYSA-M Lithium hydroxide Chemical compound [Li+].[OH-] WMFOQBRAJBCJND-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 6
- JGFZNNIVVJXRND-UHFFFAOYSA-N N,N-Diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA) Chemical compound CCN(C(C)C)C(C)C JGFZNNIVVJXRND-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 6
- 229940005530 anxiolytics Drugs 0.000 description 6
- 230000006399 behavior Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 239000002775 capsule Substances 0.000 description 6
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 6
- 230000003111 delayed effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 201000010099 disease Diseases 0.000 description 6
- 206010015037 epilepsy Diseases 0.000 description 6
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 6
- TWXDDNPPQUTEOV-FVGYRXGTSA-N methamphetamine hydrochloride Chemical compound Cl.CN[C@@H](C)CC1=CC=CC=C1 TWXDDNPPQUTEOV-FVGYRXGTSA-N 0.000 description 6
- ISWSIDIOOBJBQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenol group Chemical group C1(=CC=CC=C1)O ISWSIDIOOBJBQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 6
- 108090000623 proteins and genes Proteins 0.000 description 6
- 239000003204 tranquilizing agent Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000002936 tranquilizing effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- AIFRHYZBTHREPW-UHFFFAOYSA-N β-carboline Chemical class N1=CC=C2C3=CC=CC=C3NC2=C1 AIFRHYZBTHREPW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- HXTJLZHVUDZEMD-UHFFFAOYSA-N (8-chloro-1-methyl-6-phenyl-4h-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a][1,4]benzodiazepin-4-yl)methanol Chemical compound C12=CC(Cl)=CC=C2N2C(C)=NN=C2C(CO)N=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 HXTJLZHVUDZEMD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetic acid Chemical compound CC(O)=O QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical group N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- IAZDPXIOMUYVGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dimethylsulphoxide Chemical compound CS(C)=O IAZDPXIOMUYVGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycerine Chemical compound OCC(O)CO PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 241000699666 Mus <mouse, genus> Species 0.000 description 5
- 108010029485 Protein Isoforms Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 102000001708 Protein Isoforms Human genes 0.000 description 5
- FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium chloride Chemical compound [Na+].[Cl-] FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 5
- 239000002253 acid Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000008484 agonism Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000036626 alertness Effects 0.000 description 5
- 150000001503 aryl iodides Chemical class 0.000 description 5
- 125000001797 benzyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(C([H])=C1[H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 5
- 125000001246 bromo group Chemical group Br* 0.000 description 5
- 210000003169 central nervous system Anatomy 0.000 description 5
- 238000004587 chromatography analysis Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000002552 dosage form Substances 0.000 description 5
- 231100000673 dose–response relationship Toxicity 0.000 description 5
- 239000002895 emetic Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000002349 favourable effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000004907 flux Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000007903 gelatin capsule Substances 0.000 description 5
- 210000004124 hock Anatomy 0.000 description 5
- 150000002430 hydrocarbons Chemical group 0.000 description 5
- 230000001976 improved effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000002401 inhibitory effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000037023 motor activity Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000000269 nucleophilic effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 125000001997 phenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(*)C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 5
- 239000000843 powder Substances 0.000 description 5
- 235000018102 proteins Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- 102000004169 proteins and genes Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 230000035939 shock Effects 0.000 description 5
- 208000019116 sleep disease Diseases 0.000 description 5
- 241000894007 species Species 0.000 description 5
- 229960003386 triazolam Drugs 0.000 description 5
- JOFWLTCLBGQGBO-UHFFFAOYSA-N triazolam Chemical compound C12=CC(Cl)=CC=C2N2C(C)=NN=C2CN=C1C1=CC=CC=C1Cl JOFWLTCLBGQGBO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- LENZDBCJOHFCAS-UHFFFAOYSA-N tris Chemical compound OCC(N)(CO)CO LENZDBCJOHFCAS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- GUJAGMICFDYKNR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,4-benzodiazepine Chemical class N1C=CN=CC2=CC=CC=C12 GUJAGMICFDYKNR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- ZWEHNKRNPOVVGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-Butanone Chemical compound CCC(C)=O ZWEHNKRNPOVVGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 239000003477 4 aminobutyric acid receptor stimulating agent Substances 0.000 description 4
- QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ammonia Chemical compound N QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Argon Chemical compound [Ar] XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- KPYSYYIEGFHWSV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Baclofen Chemical compound OC(=O)CC(CN)C1=CC=C(Cl)C=C1 KPYSYYIEGFHWSV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229920000168 Microcrystalline cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 4
- GLUUGHFHXGJENI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Piperazine Chemical compound C1CNCCN1 GLUUGHFHXGJENI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- CDBYLPFSWZWCQE-UHFFFAOYSA-L Sodium Carbonate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[O-]C([O-])=O CDBYLPFSWZWCQE-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 4
- UIIMBOGNXHQVGW-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium bicarbonate Chemical compound [Na+].OC([O-])=O UIIMBOGNXHQVGW-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 4
- CZMRCDWAGMRECN-UGDNZRGBSA-N Sucrose Chemical compound O[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@@]1(CO)O[C@@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O1 CZMRCDWAGMRECN-UGDNZRGBSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229930006000 Sucrose Natural products 0.000 description 4
- 239000007983 Tris buffer Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000001154 acute effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 125000002877 alkyl aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 238000010171 animal model Methods 0.000 description 4
- 229960000794 baclofen Drugs 0.000 description 4
- 230000003542 behavioural effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- XSCHRSMBECNVNS-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzopyrazine Natural products N1=CC=NC2=CC=CC=C21 XSCHRSMBECNVNS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- RYYVLZVUVIJVGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N caffeine Chemical compound CN1C(=O)N(C)C(=O)C2=C1N=CN2C RYYVLZVUVIJVGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 4
- 125000001309 chloro group Chemical group Cl* 0.000 description 4
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000010511 deprotection reaction Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 4
- FAMRKDQNMBBFBR-BQYQJAHWSA-N diethyl azodicarboxylate Substances CCOC(=O)\N=N\C(=O)OCC FAMRKDQNMBBFBR-BQYQJAHWSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 150000002009 diols Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- FAMRKDQNMBBFBR-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethyl n-ethoxycarbonyliminocarbamate Chemical compound CCOC(=O)N=NC(=O)OCC FAMRKDQNMBBFBR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- KLNFAMGHSZQYHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N imidazo[4,5-i][1,2]benzodiazepine Chemical class C1=CC=NN=C2C3=NC=NC3=CC=C21 KLNFAMGHSZQYHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 238000007912 intraperitoneal administration Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000013016 learning Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000014759 maintenance of location Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 4
- 235000019813 microcrystalline cellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- 239000008108 microcrystalline cellulose Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229940016286 microcrystalline cellulose Drugs 0.000 description 4
- 125000001624 naphthyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 210000002569 neuron Anatomy 0.000 description 4
- 239000002858 neurotransmitter agent Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000008188 pellet Substances 0.000 description 4
- WEXRUCMBJFQVBZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N pentobarbital Chemical compound CCCC(C)C1(CC)C(=O)NC(=O)NC1=O WEXRUCMBJFQVBZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 239000006187 pill Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229920001223 polyethylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 4
- BWHMMNNQKKPAPP-UHFFFAOYSA-L potassium carbonate Chemical compound [K+].[K+].[O-]C([O-])=O BWHMMNNQKKPAPP-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 4
- 230000028527 righting reflex Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229910052708 sodium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000005720 sucrose Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229940124530 sulfonamide Drugs 0.000 description 4
- 238000003786 synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000010189 synthetic method Methods 0.000 description 4
- YLQBMQCUIZJEEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetrahydrofuran Natural products C=1C=COC=1 YLQBMQCUIZJEEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 210000001519 tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 4
- 125000004953 trihalomethyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 229930195735 unsaturated hydrocarbon Natural products 0.000 description 4
- 239000003981 vehicle Substances 0.000 description 4
- 125000003088 (fluoren-9-ylmethoxy)carbonyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- KDCGOANMDULRCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7H-purine Chemical compound N1=CNC2=NC=NC2=C1 KDCGOANMDULRCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- WEVYAHXRMPXWCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetonitrile Chemical compound CC#N WEVYAHXRMPXWCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-XLOQQCSPSA-N Alpha-Lactose Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1O[C@@H]1[C@@H](CO)O[C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H]1O GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-XLOQQCSPSA-N 0.000 description 3
- UHOVQNZJYSORNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Benzene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1 UHOVQNZJYSORNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- CPELXLSAUQHCOX-UHFFFAOYSA-M Bromide Chemical compound [Br-] CPELXLSAUQHCOX-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 3
- 102000011045 Chloride Channels Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108010062745 Chloride Channels Proteins 0.000 description 3
- SIKJAQJRHWYJAI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Indole Chemical compound C1=CC=C2NC=CC2=C1 SIKJAQJRHWYJAI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-QKKXKWKRSA-N Lactose Natural products OC[C@H]1O[C@@H](O[C@H]2[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)C(O)O[C@@H]2CO)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-QKKXKWKRSA-N 0.000 description 3
- OFOBLEOULBTSOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Malonic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CC(O)=O OFOBLEOULBTSOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000005481 NMR spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 3
- MUBZPKHOEPUJKR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Oxalic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C(O)=O MUBZPKHOEPUJKR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- KWYUFKZDYYNOTN-UHFFFAOYSA-M Potassium hydroxide Chemical compound [OH-].[K+] KWYUFKZDYYNOTN-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 3
- NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfur Chemical group [S] NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 150000001345 alkine derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- HSFWRNGVRCDJHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N alpha-acetylene Natural products C#C HSFWRNGVRCDJHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000008485 antagonism Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 3
- 125000002843 carboxylic acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 239000003054 catalyst Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000012512 characterization method Methods 0.000 description 3
- KRKNYBCHXYNGOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N citric acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CC(O)(C(O)=O)CC(O)=O KRKNYBCHXYNGOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- DGBIGWXXNGSACT-UHFFFAOYSA-N clonazepam Chemical compound C12=CC([N+](=O)[O-])=CC=C2NC(=O)CN=C1C1=CC=CC=C1Cl DGBIGWXXNGSACT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229960003120 clonazepam Drugs 0.000 description 3
- IYGYMKDQCDOMRE-UHFFFAOYSA-N d-Bicucullin Natural products CN1CCC2=CC=3OCOC=3C=C2C1C1OC(=O)C2=C1C=CC1=C2OCO1 IYGYMKDQCDOMRE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- ZUOUZKKEUPVFJK-UHFFFAOYSA-N diphenyl Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 ZUOUZKKEUPVFJK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 125000005677 ethinylene group Chemical group [*:2]C#C[*:1] 0.000 description 3
- 125000004494 ethyl ester group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 125000001495 ethyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 3
- 239000000796 flavoring agent Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229960002200 flunitrazepam Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 125000005842 heteroatom Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- NAQMVNRVTILPCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexane-1,6-diamine Chemical compound NCCCCCCN NAQMVNRVTILPCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000002102 hyperpolarization Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000003326 hypnotic agent Substances 0.000 description 3
- RAXXELZNTBOGNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N imidazole Natural products C1=CNC=N1 RAXXELZNTBOGNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000005764 inhibitory process Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 3
- 125000002346 iodo group Chemical group I* 0.000 description 3
- 239000008101 lactose Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000002609 medium Substances 0.000 description 3
- 150000004702 methyl esters Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000003158 myorelaxant agent Substances 0.000 description 3
- NFHFRUOZVGFOOS-UHFFFAOYSA-N palladium;triphenylphosphane Chemical compound [Pd].C1=CC=CC=C1P(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1.C1=CC=CC=C1P(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1.C1=CC=CC=C1P(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1.C1=CC=CC=C1P(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 NFHFRUOZVGFOOS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 208000019906 panic disease Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000001267 polyvinylpyrrolidone Substances 0.000 description 3
- 235000013855 polyvinylpyrrolidone Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 229920000036 polyvinylpyrrolidone Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 230000001242 postsynaptic effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000003389 potentiating effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000002265 prevention Effects 0.000 description 3
- 108090000765 processed proteins & peptides Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 102000004196 processed proteins & peptides Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 239000011541 reaction mixture Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229940044601 receptor agonist Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 239000000018 receptor agonist Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000012216 screening Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000036578 sleeping time Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000011780 sodium chloride Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000009870 specific binding Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000005556 structure-activity relationship Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000007920 subcutaneous administration Methods 0.000 description 3
- 125000003107 substituted aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 150000003461 sulfonyl halides Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 229910052717 sulfur Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 239000011593 sulfur Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 239000000829 suppository Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000000454 talc Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910052623 talc Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 235000012222 talc Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- JOXIMZWYDAKGHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N toluene-4-sulfonic acid Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(S(O)(=O)=O)C=C1 JOXIMZWYDAKGHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 125000002088 tosyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C(=C([H])C([H])=C1C([H])([H])[H])S(*)(=O)=O 0.000 description 3
- 230000008673 vomiting Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000005303 weighing Methods 0.000 description 3
- NWZSZGALRFJKBT-KNIFDHDWSA-N (2s)-2,6-diaminohexanoic acid;(2s)-2-hydroxybutanedioic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](O)CC(O)=O.NCCCC[C@H](N)C(O)=O NWZSZGALRFJKBT-KNIFDHDWSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KWTSXDURSIMDCE-QMMMGPOBSA-N (S)-amphetamine Chemical compound C[C@H](N)CC1=CC=CC=C1 KWTSXDURSIMDCE-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 2
- BDNKZNFMNDZQMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-diisopropylcarbodiimide Chemical compound CC(C)N=C=NC(C)C BDNKZNFMNDZQMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FPIRBHDGWMWJEP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole Chemical compound C1=CN=C2N(O)N=NC2=C1 FPIRBHDGWMWJEP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KORIJXKQGMTQTO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1h-pyrrol-2-ylmethanol Chemical compound OCC1=CC=CN1 KORIJXKQGMTQTO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- GVNVAWHJIKLAGL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(cyclohexen-1-yl)cyclohexan-1-one Chemical compound O=C1CCCCC1C1=CCCCC1 GVNVAWHJIKLAGL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HZAXFHJVJLSVMW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-Aminoethan-1-ol Chemical compound NCCO HZAXFHJVJLSVMW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QBWKPGNFQQJGFY-QLFBSQMISA-N 3-[(1r)-1-[(2r,6s)-2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]ethyl]-n-[6-methyl-3-(1h-pyrazol-4-yl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyrazin-8-yl]-1,2-thiazol-5-amine Chemical compound N1([C@H](C)C2=NSC(NC=3C4=NC=C(N4C=C(C)N=3)C3=CNN=C3)=C2)C[C@H](C)O[C@H](C)C1 QBWKPGNFQQJGFY-QLFBSQMISA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229960000549 4-dimethylaminophenol Drugs 0.000 description 2
- HPYKUUFRYIDMTJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-(2-bromophenyl)-8-fluoro-4h-imidazo[1,5-a][1,4]benzodiazepine-3-carbonyl chloride Chemical compound C=1C(F)=CC=C(N2C=NC(=C2CN=2)C(Cl)=O)C=1C=2C1=CC=CC=C1Br HPYKUUFRYIDMTJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- RURWAYHDLRPVAE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-(methylamino)hexan-1-ol Chemical compound CNCCCCCCO RURWAYHDLRPVAE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- SUTWPJHCRAITLU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-aminohexan-1-ol Chemical compound NCCCCCCO SUTWPJHCRAITLU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UJOBWOGCFQCDNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9H-carbazole Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C3=CC=CC=C3NC2=C1 UJOBWOGCFQCDNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000035502 ADME Effects 0.000 description 2
- 208000024827 Alzheimer disease Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 206010002091 Anaesthesia Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 241000272522 Anas Species 0.000 description 2
- 206010003591 Ataxia Diseases 0.000 description 2
- IYGYMKDQCDOMRE-QRWMCTBCSA-N Bicculine Chemical compound O([C@H]1C2C3=CC=4OCOC=4C=C3CCN2C)C(=O)C2=C1C=CC1=C2OCO1 IYGYMKDQCDOMRE-QRWMCTBCSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 108091006146 Channels Proteins 0.000 description 2
- HEDRZPFGACZZDS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chloroform Chemical compound ClC(Cl)Cl HEDRZPFGACZZDS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 101150065749 Churc1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 229910021595 Copper(I) iodide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- AOJJSUZBOXZQNB-TZSSRYMLSA-N Doxorubicin Chemical compound O([C@H]1C[C@@](O)(CC=2C(O)=C3C(=O)C=4C=CC=C(C=4C(=O)C3=C(O)C=21)OC)C(=O)CO)[C@H]1C[C@H](N)[C@H](O)[C@H](C)O1 AOJJSUZBOXZQNB-TZSSRYMLSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KCXVZYZYPLLWCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N EDTA Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CCN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O KCXVZYZYPLLWCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- VGGSQFUCUMXWEO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethene Chemical compound C=C VGGSQFUCUMXWEO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000005977 Ethylene Substances 0.000 description 2
- VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-OWOJBTEDSA-N Fumaric acid Chemical compound OC(=O)\C=C\C(O)=O VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-OWOJBTEDSA-N 0.000 description 2
- JZNWSCPGTDBMEW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycerophosphorylethanolamin Natural products NCCOP(O)(=O)OCC(O)CO JZNWSCPGTDBMEW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- AEMRFAOFKBGASW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycolic acid Chemical compound OCC(O)=O AEMRFAOFKBGASW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QIGBRXMKCJKVMJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydroquinone Chemical compound OC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 QIGBRXMKCJKVMJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 206010021118 Hypotonia Diseases 0.000 description 2
- DGAQECJNVWCQMB-PUAWFVPOSA-M Ilexoside XXIX Chemical compound C[C@@H]1CC[C@@]2(CC[C@@]3(C(=CC[C@H]4[C@]3(CC[C@@H]5[C@@]4(CC[C@@H](C5(C)C)OS(=O)(=O)[O-])C)C)[C@@H]2[C@]1(C)O)C)C(=O)O[C@H]6[C@@H]([C@H]([C@@H]([C@H](O6)CO)O)O)O.[Na+] DGAQECJNVWCQMB-PUAWFVPOSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 102000004310 Ion Channels Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108090000862 Ion Channels Proteins 0.000 description 2
- LPHGQDQBBGAPDZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Isocaffeine Natural products CN1C(=O)N(C)C(=O)C2=C1N(C)C=N2 LPHGQDQBBGAPDZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KFZMGEQAYNKOFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Isopropanol Chemical compound CC(C)O KFZMGEQAYNKOFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- AFVFQIVMOAPDHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methanesulfonic acid Chemical compound CS(O)(=O)=O AFVFQIVMOAPDHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000006751 Mitsunobu reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- YNAVUWVOSKDBBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Morpholine Chemical compound C1COCCN1 YNAVUWVOSKDBBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- SECXISVLQFMRJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-Methylpyrrolidone Chemical compound CN1CCCC1=O SECXISVLQFMRJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 206010028813 Nausea Diseases 0.000 description 2
- MWUXSHHQAYIFBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Nitric oxide Chemical compound O=[N] MWUXSHHQAYIFBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- PCNDJXKNXGMECE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phenazine Natural products C1=CC=CC2=NC3=CC=CC=C3N=C21 PCNDJXKNXGMECE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphoric acid Chemical compound OP(O)(O)=O NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphorus Chemical compound [P] OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 102100038239 Protein Churchill Human genes 0.000 description 2
- KYQCOXFCLRTKLS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyrazine Chemical compound C1=CN=CC=N1 KYQCOXFCLRTKLS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KAESVJOAVNADME-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyrrole Chemical compound C=1C=CNC=1 KAESVJOAVNADME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LCTONWCANYUPML-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyruvic acid Chemical compound CC(=O)C(O)=O LCTONWCANYUPML-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- SMWDFEZZVXVKRB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Quinoline Chemical compound N1=CC=CC2=CC=CC=C21 SMWDFEZZVXVKRB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 241000283984 Rodentia Species 0.000 description 2
- 208000007271 Substance Withdrawal Syndrome Diseases 0.000 description 2
- QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfuric acid Chemical compound OS(O)(=O)=O QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- RLFKILXOLJVUNF-UHFFFAOYSA-N abecarnil Chemical compound C1=C2C=3C(COC)=C(C(=O)OC(C)C)N=CC=3NC2=CC=C1OCC1=CC=CC=C1 RLFKILXOLJVUNF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229950000552 abecarnil Drugs 0.000 description 2
- DPXJVFZANSGRMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetic acid;2,3,4,5,6-pentahydroxyhexanal;sodium Chemical compound [Na].CC(O)=O.OCC(O)C(O)C(O)C(O)C=O DPXJVFZANSGRMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000007513 acids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- DZBUGLKDJFMEHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N acridine Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=CC3=CC=CC=C3N=C21 DZBUGLKDJFMEHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000001931 aliphatic group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 125000005055 alkyl alkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 125000006242 amine protecting group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 230000037005 anaesthesia Effects 0.000 description 2
- 125000000129 anionic group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 230000000454 anti-cipatory effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000935 antidepressant agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052786 argon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N atomic oxygen Chemical group [O] QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229940125717 barbiturate Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 125000003310 benzodiazepinyl group Chemical group N1N=C(C=CC2=C1C=CC=C2)* 0.000 description 2
- WPYMKLBDIGXBTP-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 WPYMKLBDIGXBTP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- AACMFFIUYXGCOC-UHFFFAOYSA-N bicuculline Natural products CN1CCc2cc3OCOc3cc2C1C4OCc5c6OCOc6ccc45 AACMFFIUYXGCOC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000004305 biphenyl Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000010290 biphenyl Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- YNHIGQDRGKUECZ-UHFFFAOYSA-L bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(ii) dichloride Chemical compound [Cl-].[Cl-].[Pd+2].C1=CC=CC=C1P(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1.C1=CC=CC=C1P(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 YNHIGQDRGKUECZ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- 229960001948 caffeine Drugs 0.000 description 2
- VJEONQKOZGKCAK-UHFFFAOYSA-N caffeine Natural products CN1C(=O)N(C)C(=O)C2=C1C=CN2C VJEONQKOZGKCAK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NYVPYOCCTPDTKV-UHFFFAOYSA-N carbamic acid;isocyanic acid Chemical compound N=C=O.NC(O)=O NYVPYOCCTPDTKV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000001720 carbohydrates Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- CREMABGTGYGIQB-UHFFFAOYSA-N carbon carbon Chemical compound C.C CREMABGTGYGIQB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000011203 carbon fibre reinforced carbon Substances 0.000 description 2
- PFKFTWBEEFSNDU-UHFFFAOYSA-N carbonyldiimidazole Chemical compound C1=CN=CN1C(=O)N1C=CN=C1 PFKFTWBEEFSNDU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000001768 carboxy methyl cellulose Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000002091 cationic group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 150000001768 cations Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 210000004027 cell Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 235000010980 cellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 229920002678 cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000001913 cellulose Substances 0.000 description 2
- 210000001638 cerebellum Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 210000003710 cerebral cortex Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 239000003638 chemical reducing agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229960004782 chlordiazepoxide Drugs 0.000 description 2
- ANTSCNMPPGJYLG-UHFFFAOYSA-N chlordiazepoxide Chemical compound O=N=1CC(NC)=NC2=CC=C(Cl)C=C2C=1C1=CC=CC=C1 ANTSCNMPPGJYLG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229940125846 compound 25 Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 230000001143 conditioned effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000010276 construction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000007796 conventional method Methods 0.000 description 2
- LSXDOTMGLUJQCM-UHFFFAOYSA-M copper(i) iodide Chemical compound I[Cu] LSXDOTMGLUJQCM-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 230000002596 correlated effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000000586 desensitisation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000004985 diamines Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- BGRWYRAHAFMIBJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N diisopropylcarbodiimide Natural products CC(C)NC(=O)NC(C)C BGRWYRAHAFMIBJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000003085 diluting agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- XBDQKXXYIPTUBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N dimethylselenoniopropionate Natural products CCC(O)=O XBDQKXXYIPTUBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NRJVHCSYLGLURI-UHFFFAOYSA-N divaplon Chemical compound C=1N2C(C)=C(CC)C(OC)=NC2=NC=1C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 NRJVHCSYLGLURI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000001035 drying Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000008387 emulsifying waxe Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000012055 enteric layer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000002170 ethers Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 235000019634 flavors Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 229910052731 fluorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- SAADBVWGJQAEFS-UHFFFAOYSA-N flurazepam Chemical compound N=1CC(=O)N(CCN(CC)CC)C2=CC=C(Cl)C=C2C=1C1=CC=CC=C1F SAADBVWGJQAEFS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229960003528 flurazepam Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 125000002541 furyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 235000011187 glycerol Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- KWIUHFFTVRNATP-UHFFFAOYSA-N glycine betaine Chemical compound C[N+](C)(C)CC([O-])=O KWIUHFFTVRNATP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000008187 granular material Substances 0.000 description 2
- LNEPOXFFQSENCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N haloperidol Chemical compound C1CC(O)(C=2C=CC(Cl)=CC=2)CCN1CCCC(=O)C1=CC=C(F)C=C1 LNEPOXFFQSENCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- BXWNKGSJHAJOGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexadecan-1-ol Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCO BXWNKGSJHAJOGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 210000001320 hippocampus Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- IKDUDTNKRLTJSI-UHFFFAOYSA-N hydrazine monohydrate Substances O.NN IKDUDTNKRLTJSI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- IXCSERBJSXMMFS-UHFFFAOYSA-N hydrogen chloride Substances Cl.Cl IXCSERBJSXMMFS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910000041 hydrogen chloride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 238000007327 hydrogenolysis reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 description 2
- BMGXAZCDDYTVFV-UHFFFAOYSA-N imidazo[4,5-c]diazepine Chemical compound C1=CN=NC2=NC=NC2=C1 BMGXAZCDDYTVFV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000010348 incorporation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000003701 inert diluent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000004941 influx Effects 0.000 description 2
- 150000007529 inorganic bases Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 238000007918 intramuscular administration Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000001990 intravenous administration Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000002500 ions Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000000959 isobutyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 2
- 125000001449 isopropyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 2
- AWJUIBRHMBBTKR-UHFFFAOYSA-N isoquinoline Chemical compound C1=NC=CC2=CC=CC=C21 AWJUIBRHMBBTKR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 108091007266 isoreceptors Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 238000012804 iterative process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229940057995 liquid paraffin Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 239000011777 magnesium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 206010025482 malaise Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 210000005171 mammalian brain Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000001160 methoxycarbonyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])OC(*)=O 0.000 description 2
- BCDIWLCKOCHCIH-UHFFFAOYSA-N methylphosphinic acid Chemical compound CP(O)=O BCDIWLCKOCHCIH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000004170 methylsulfonyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])S(*)(=O)=O 0.000 description 2
- 239000000693 micelle Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000007522 mineralic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000000897 modulatory effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000178 monomer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000036640 muscle relaxation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000008693 nausea Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000008062 neuronal firing Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000003921 oil Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000019198 oils Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 150000007524 organic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 235000005985 organic acids Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 150000007530 organic bases Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000003960 organic solvent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000001301 oxygen Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000012188 paraffin wax Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229960001412 pentobarbital Drugs 0.000 description 2
- VSGNGLJPOGUDON-UHFFFAOYSA-N phaclofen Chemical compound OP(=O)(O)CC(CN)C1=CC=C(Cl)C=C1 VSGNGLJPOGUDON-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000008177 pharmaceutical agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229940124531 pharmaceutical excipient Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 239000012071 phase Substances 0.000 description 2
- RDOWQLZANAYVLL-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenanthridine Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C3=CC=CC=C3C=NC2=C1 RDOWQLZANAYVLL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UYWQUFXKFGHYNT-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenylmethyl ester of formic acid Natural products O=COCC1=CC=CC=C1 UYWQUFXKFGHYNT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WTJKGGKOPKCXLL-RRHRGVEJSA-N phosphatidylcholine Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](COP([O-])(=O)OCC[N+](C)(C)C)OC(=O)CCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCC WTJKGGKOPKCXLL-RRHRGVEJSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052698 phosphorus Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000011574 phosphorus Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000003367 polycyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229910000027 potassium carbonate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229940002612 prodrug Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 239000000651 prodrug Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000011321 prophylaxis Methods 0.000 description 2
- KIDHWZJUCRJVML-UHFFFAOYSA-N putrescine Chemical compound NCCCCN KIDHWZJUCRJVML-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000004076 pyridyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 230000005855 radiation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000001959 radiotherapy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000376 reactant Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000000384 rearing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000012552 review Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000009183 running Effects 0.000 description 2
- YGSDEFSMJLZEOE-UHFFFAOYSA-N salicylic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1O YGSDEFSMJLZEOE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920006395 saturated elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229930195734 saturated hydrocarbon Natural products 0.000 description 2
- 125000002914 sec-butyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 2
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 2
- WXMKPNITSTVMEF-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium benzoate Chemical compound [Na+].[O-]C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 WXMKPNITSTVMEF-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 239000004299 sodium benzoate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000010234 sodium benzoate Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 229910000030 sodium bicarbonate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 235000017557 sodium bicarbonate Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 229910000029 sodium carbonate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 235000019812 sodium carboxymethyl cellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 229920001027 sodium carboxymethylcellulose Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000008247 solid mixture Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000003408 sphingolipids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 238000010561 standard procedure Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000007858 starting material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000008223 sterile water Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000001273 sulfonato group Chemical group [O-]S(*)(=O)=O 0.000 description 2
- 208000024891 symptom Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 235000020357 syrup Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 239000006188 syrup Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000008685 targeting Effects 0.000 description 2
- DYHSDKLCOJIUFX-UHFFFAOYSA-N tert-butoxycarbonyl anhydride Chemical compound CC(C)(C)OC(=O)OC(=O)OC(C)(C)C DYHSDKLCOJIUFX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000000999 tert-butyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C(*)(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 2
- YAPQBXQYLJRXSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N theobromine Chemical compound CN1C(=O)NC(=O)C2=C1N=CN2C YAPQBXQYLJRXSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ZFXYFBGIUFBOJW-UHFFFAOYSA-N theophylline Chemical compound O=C1N(C)C(=O)N(C)C2=C1NC=N2 ZFXYFBGIUFBOJW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 231100001274 therapeutic index Toxicity 0.000 description 2
- 230000001988 toxicity Effects 0.000 description 2
- 231100000419 toxicity Toxicity 0.000 description 2
- VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-UHFFFAOYSA-N trans-butenedioic acid Natural products OC(=O)C=CC(O)=O VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000005270 trialkylamine group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 239000013638 trimer Substances 0.000 description 2
- GETQZCLCWQTVFV-UHFFFAOYSA-N trimethylamine Chemical compound CN(C)C GETQZCLCWQTVFV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000002221 trityl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C([H])C([H])=C1C([*])(C1=C(C(=C(C(=C1[H])[H])[H])[H])[H])C1=C([H])C([H])=C([H])C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 2
- 239000000230 xanthan gum Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000010493 xanthan gum Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 229920001285 xanthan gum Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229940082509 xanthan gum Drugs 0.000 description 2
- BXNRTMZZILHVNJ-ZRZAMGCNSA-N (1s,5r)-7-butyl-3-[4-[4-(2-methoxyphenyl)piperazin-1-yl]butyl]-9,9-dimethyl-3,7-diazabicyclo[3.3.1]nonane-2,4,6,8-tetrone Chemical compound O=C([C@@H]1C(=O)N(C([C@H](C2=O)C1(C)C)=O)CCCC)N2CCCCN(CC1)CCN1C1=CC=CC=C1OC BXNRTMZZILHVNJ-ZRZAMGCNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QBYIENPQHBMVBV-HFEGYEGKSA-N (2R)-2-hydroxy-2-phenylacetic acid Chemical compound O[C@@H](C(O)=O)c1ccccc1.O[C@@H](C(O)=O)c1ccccc1 QBYIENPQHBMVBV-HFEGYEGKSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IWZSHWBGHQBIML-ZGGLMWTQSA-N (3S,8S,10R,13S,14S,17S)-17-isoquinolin-7-yl-N,N,10,13-tetramethyl-2,3,4,7,8,9,11,12,14,15,16,17-dodecahydro-1H-cyclopenta[a]phenanthren-3-amine Chemical compound CN(C)[C@H]1CC[C@]2(C)C3CC[C@@]4(C)[C@@H](CC[C@@H]4c4ccc5ccncc5c4)[C@@H]3CC=C2C1 IWZSHWBGHQBIML-ZGGLMWTQSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MPDDTAJMJCESGV-CTUHWIOQSA-M (3r,5r)-7-[2-(4-fluorophenyl)-5-[methyl-[(1r)-1-phenylethyl]carbamoyl]-4-propan-2-ylpyrazol-3-yl]-3,5-dihydroxyheptanoate Chemical compound C1([C@@H](C)N(C)C(=O)C2=NN(C(CC[C@@H](O)C[C@@H](O)CC([O-])=O)=C2C(C)C)C=2C=CC(F)=CC=2)=CC=CC=C1 MPDDTAJMJCESGV-CTUHWIOQSA-M 0.000 description 1
- DIWRORZWFLOCLC-HNNXBMFYSA-N (3s)-7-chloro-5-(2-chlorophenyl)-3-hydroxy-1,3-dihydro-1,4-benzodiazepin-2-one Chemical compound N([C@H](C(NC1=CC=C(Cl)C=C11)=O)O)=C1C1=CC=CC=C1Cl DIWRORZWFLOCLC-HNNXBMFYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CLUQWSRYSHBBDD-DYXFYOPSSA-N (4s)-4-[(2-amino-4-methylsulfanylbutanoyl)amino]-5-[[(2s)-1-[[(2s)-1-[[(2s)-1-[[(1s)-1-carboxy-2-(1h-indol-3-yl)ethyl]amino]-5-(diaminomethylideneamino)-1-oxopentan-2-yl]amino]-1-oxo-3-phenylpropan-2-yl]amino]-3-(1h-imidazol-5-yl)-1-oxopropan-2-yl]amino]- Chemical class C([C@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)C(N)CCSC)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCN=C(N)N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)C(O)=O)C1=CN=CN1 CLUQWSRYSHBBDD-DYXFYOPSSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HAAUASBAIUJHAN-LXOXETEGSA-N (4s)-4-[[(2s)-2-amino-4-methylsulfanylbutanoyl]amino]-5-[[(2s)-1-[[(2s)-1-[[(2s)-1-[[(2s)-1-(carboxymethylamino)-3-(1h-indol-3-yl)-1-oxopropan-2-yl]amino]-5-(diaminomethylideneamino)-1-oxopentan-2-yl]amino]-1-oxo-3-phenylpropan-2-yl]amino]-3-(1h-imidazol- Chemical compound C([C@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCSC)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCN=C(N)N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)C(=O)NCC(O)=O)C1=CN=CN1 HAAUASBAIUJHAN-LXOXETEGSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QUCFVNGGGFLOES-ACQYNFKHSA-N (4s)-5-[[(2s)-1-[[(2s)-1-[[(2r)-6-amino-1-[[(1s)-1-carboxy-2-phenylethyl]amino]-1-oxohexan-2-yl]amino]-1-oxo-3-phenylpropan-2-yl]amino]-3-(1h-imidazol-5-yl)-1-oxopropan-2-yl]amino]-4-[[(2s)-2-amino-4-methylsulfonylbutanoyl]amino]-5-oxopentanoic acid Chemical compound C([C@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@@H](N)CCS(=O)(=O)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(=O)N[C@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(O)=O)C1=CN=CN1 QUCFVNGGGFLOES-ACQYNFKHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BJEPYKJPYRNKOW-REOHCLBHSA-N (S)-malic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](O)CC(O)=O BJEPYKJPYRNKOW-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RCEDCOCCCMIKCY-ZVCJTHDASA-N (e)-but-2-enedioic acid;octyl (2s,3as,6as)-1-[(2s)-2-[[(2s)-1-ethoxy-1-oxo-4-phenylbutan-2-yl]amino]propanoyl]-3,3a,4,5,6,6a-hexahydro-2h-cyclopenta[b]pyrrole-2-carboxylate Chemical compound OC(=O)\C=C\C(O)=O.C([C@H](N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N1[C@H]2CCC[C@H]2C[C@H]1C(=O)OCCCCCCCC)C(=O)OCC)CC1=CC=CC=C1 RCEDCOCCCMIKCY-ZVCJTHDASA-N 0.000 description 1
- WBYWAXJHAXSJNI-VOTSOKGWSA-M .beta-Phenylacrylic acid Natural products [O-]C(=O)\C=C\C1=CC=CC=C1 WBYWAXJHAXSJNI-VOTSOKGWSA-M 0.000 description 1
- FVXDQWZBHIXIEJ-LNDKUQBDSA-N 1,2-di-[(9Z,12Z)-octadecadienoyl]-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine Chemical compound CCCCC\C=C/C\C=C/CCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](COP([O-])(=O)OCC[N+](C)(C)C)OC(=O)CCCCCCC\C=C/C\C=C/CCCCC FVXDQWZBHIXIEJ-LNDKUQBDSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KILNVBDSWZSGLL-KXQOOQHDSA-N 1,2-dihexadecanoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](COP([O-])(=O)OCC[N+](C)(C)C)OC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC KILNVBDSWZSGLL-KXQOOQHDSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PORPENFLTBBHSG-MGBGTMOVSA-N 1,2-dihexadecanoyl-sn-glycerol-3-phosphate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](COP(O)(O)=O)OC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC PORPENFLTBBHSG-MGBGTMOVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IRFSXVIRXMYULF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,2-dihydroquinoline Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C=CCNC2=C1 IRFSXVIRXMYULF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SNKAWJBJQDLSFF-NVKMUCNASA-N 1,2-dioleoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine Chemical compound CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](COP([O-])(=O)OCC[N+](C)(C)C)OC(=O)CCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC SNKAWJBJQDLSFF-NVKMUCNASA-N 0.000 description 1
- NRJAVPSFFCBXDT-HUESYALOSA-N 1,2-distearoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](COP([O-])(=O)OCC[N+](C)(C)C)OC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC NRJAVPSFFCBXDT-HUESYALOSA-N 0.000 description 1
- TZCPCKNHXULUIY-RGULYWFUSA-N 1,2-distearoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoserine Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@H](COP(O)(=O)OC[C@H](N)C(O)=O)OC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC TZCPCKNHXULUIY-RGULYWFUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KKHFRAFPESRGGD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-dimethyl-7-[3-(n-methylanilino)propyl]purine-2,6-dione Chemical compound C1=NC=2N(C)C(=O)N(C)C(=O)C=2N1CCCN(C)C1=CC=CC=C1 KKHFRAFPESRGGD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RYHBNJHYFVUHQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,4-Dioxane Chemical compound C1COCCO1 RYHBNJHYFVUHQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SGRHVVLXEBNBDV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,6-dibromohexane Chemical compound BrCCCCCCBr SGRHVVLXEBNBDV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DKEGCUDAFWNSSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,8-dibromooctane Chemical compound BrCCCCCCCCBr DKEGCUDAFWNSSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BQTRMYJYYNQQGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-(bromomethyl)-4-iodobenzene Chemical compound BrCC1=CC=C(I)C=C1 BQTRMYJYYNQQGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KQZLRWGGWXJPOS-NLFPWZOASA-N 1-[(1R)-1-(2,4-dichlorophenyl)ethyl]-6-[(4S,5R)-4-[(2S)-2-(hydroxymethyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl]-5-methylcyclohexen-1-yl]pyrazolo[3,4-b]pyrazine-3-carbonitrile Chemical compound ClC1=C(C=CC(=C1)Cl)[C@@H](C)N1N=C(C=2C1=NC(=CN=2)C1=CC[C@@H]([C@@H](C1)C)N1[C@@H](CCC1)CO)C#N KQZLRWGGWXJPOS-NLFPWZOASA-N 0.000 description 1
- WZZBNLYBHUDSHF-DHLKQENFSA-N 1-[(3s,4s)-4-[8-(2-chloro-4-pyrimidin-2-yloxyphenyl)-7-fluoro-2-methylimidazo[4,5-c]quinolin-1-yl]-3-fluoropiperidin-1-yl]-2-hydroxyethanone Chemical compound CC1=NC2=CN=C3C=C(F)C(C=4C(=CC(OC=5N=CC=CN=5)=CC=4)Cl)=CC3=C2N1[C@H]1CCN(C(=O)CO)C[C@@H]1F WZZBNLYBHUDSHF-DHLKQENFSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ONBQEOIKXPHGMB-VBSBHUPXSA-N 1-[2-[(2s,3r,4s,5r)-3,4-dihydroxy-5-(hydroxymethyl)oxolan-2-yl]oxy-4,6-dihydroxyphenyl]-3-(4-hydroxyphenyl)propan-1-one Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1OC1=CC(O)=CC(O)=C1C(=O)CCC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 ONBQEOIKXPHGMB-VBSBHUPXSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UNILWMWFPHPYOR-KXEYIPSPSA-M 1-[6-[2-[3-[3-[3-[2-[2-[3-[[2-[2-[[(2r)-1-[[2-[[(2r)-1-[3-[2-[2-[3-[[2-(2-amino-2-oxoethoxy)acetyl]amino]propoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]propylamino]-3-hydroxy-1-oxopropan-2-yl]amino]-2-oxoethyl]amino]-3-[(2r)-2,3-di(hexadecanoyloxy)propyl]sulfanyl-1-oxopropan-2-yl Chemical compound O=C1C(SCCC(=O)NCCCOCCOCCOCCCNC(=O)COCC(=O)N[C@@H](CSC[C@@H](COC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)OC(=O)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@H](CO)C(=O)NCCCOCCOCCOCCCNC(=O)COCC(N)=O)CC(=O)N1CCNC(=O)CCCCCN\1C2=CC=C(S([O-])(=O)=O)C=C2CC/1=C/C=C/C=C/C1=[N+](CC)C2=CC=C(S([O-])(=O)=O)C=C2C1 UNILWMWFPHPYOR-KXEYIPSPSA-M 0.000 description 1
- RYCNUMLMNKHWPZ-SNVBAGLBSA-N 1-acetyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine Chemical compound CC(=O)OC[C@@H](O)COP([O-])(=O)OCC[N+](C)(C)C RYCNUMLMNKHWPZ-SNVBAGLBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WJFKNYWRSNBZNX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 10H-phenothiazine Chemical compound C1=CC=C2NC3=CC=CC=C3SC2=C1 WJFKNYWRSNBZNX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- TZMSYXZUNZXBOL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 10H-phenoxazine Chemical compound C1=CC=C2NC3=CC=CC=C3OC2=C1 TZMSYXZUNZXBOL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZYSGSQZSVXGTQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1H-1,2-benzodiazepine-3-carbonyl chloride Chemical compound N1N=C(C=CC2=C1C=CC=C2)C(=O)Cl ZYSGSQZSVXGTQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BAXOFTOLAUCFNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1H-indazole Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C=NNC2=C1 BAXOFTOLAUCFNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VEPOHXYIFQMVHW-XOZOLZJESA-N 2,3-dihydroxybutanedioic acid (2S,3S)-3,4-dimethyl-2-phenylmorpholine Chemical compound OC(C(O)C(O)=O)C(O)=O.C[C@H]1[C@@H](OCCN1C)c1ccccc1 VEPOHXYIFQMVHW-XOZOLZJESA-N 0.000 description 1
- AHDSRXYHVZECER-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,4,6-tris[(dimethylamino)methyl]phenol Chemical compound CN(C)CC1=CC(CN(C)C)=C(O)C(CN(C)C)=C1 AHDSRXYHVZECER-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FQMZXMVHHKXGTM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(1-adamantyl)-n-[2-[2-(2-hydroxyethylamino)ethylamino]quinolin-5-yl]acetamide Chemical compound C1C(C2)CC(C3)CC2CC13CC(=O)NC1=CC=CC2=NC(NCCNCCO)=CC=C21 FQMZXMVHHKXGTM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SMZOUWXMTYCWNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(2-methoxy-5-methylphenyl)ethanamine Chemical group COC1=CC=C(C)C=C1CCN SMZOUWXMTYCWNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QDKCFHXLUQBVRL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(8-chloro-1-methyl-6-phenyl-4h-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a][1,4]benzodiazepin-4-yl)acetic acid Chemical compound C12=CC(Cl)=CC=C2N2C(C)=NN=C2C(CC(O)=O)N=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 QDKCFHXLUQBVRL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-Propenoic acid Chemical group OC(=O)C=C NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JKMHFZQWWAIEOD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[4-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazin-1-yl]ethanesulfonic acid Chemical compound OCC[NH+]1CCN(CCS([O-])(=O)=O)CC1 JKMHFZQWWAIEOD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MPJQIUKPIRVMKZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[7-chloro-5-(2-fluorophenyl)-3H-1,4-benzodiazepin-2-yl]-2-hydroxyiminoacetic acid Chemical compound N=1CC(C(C(O)=O)=NO)=NC2=CC=C(Cl)C=C2C=1C1=CC=CC=C1F MPJQIUKPIRVMKZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VVCMGAUPZIKYTH-VGHSCWAPSA-N 2-acetyloxybenzoic acid;[(2s,3r)-4-(dimethylamino)-3-methyl-1,2-diphenylbutan-2-yl] propanoate;1,3,7-trimethylpurine-2,6-dione Chemical compound CC(=O)OC1=CC=CC=C1C(O)=O.CN1C(=O)N(C)C(=O)C2=C1N=CN2C.C([C@](OC(=O)CC)([C@H](C)CN(C)C)C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 VVCMGAUPZIKYTH-VGHSCWAPSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MSWZFWKMSRAUBD-IVMDWMLBSA-N 2-amino-2-deoxy-D-glucopyranose Chemical compound N[C@H]1C(O)O[C@H](CO)[C@@H](O)[C@@H]1O MSWZFWKMSRAUBD-IVMDWMLBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GOJUJUVQIVIZAV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-amino-4,6-dichloropyrimidine-5-carbaldehyde Chemical group NC1=NC(Cl)=C(C=O)C(Cl)=N1 GOJUJUVQIVIZAV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SNDPXSYFESPGGJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-aminopentanoic acid Chemical compound CCCC(N)C(O)=O SNDPXSYFESPGGJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ICJFZQLAIOCZNG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-azaniumyl-4-[(2-methylpropan-2-yl)oxycarbonylamino]butanoate Chemical compound CC(C)(C)OC(=O)NCCC(N)C(O)=O ICJFZQLAIOCZNG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AUVALWUPUHHNQV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-hydroxy-3-propylbenzoic acid Chemical class CCCC1=CC=CC(C(O)=O)=C1O AUVALWUPUHHNQV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VLRSADZEDXVUPG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-naphthalen-1-ylpyridine Chemical compound N1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC2=CC=CC=C12 VLRSADZEDXVUPG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000000094 2-phenylethyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(C([H])=C1[H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 125000003903 2-propenyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])=C([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000001494 2-propynyl group Chemical group [H]C#CC([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- YDHIMEXEGOCNHU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-pyridin-3-ylacetamide Chemical compound NC(=O)CC1=CC=CN=C1 YDHIMEXEGOCNHU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VHMICKWLTGFITH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2H-isoindole Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=CNC=C21 VHMICKWLTGFITH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WBSMZVIMANOCNX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-amino-2-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-hydroxy-1-propanesulfonic acid Chemical compound OS(=O)(=O)CC(O)(CN)C1=CC=C(Cl)C=C1 WBSMZVIMANOCNX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BMYNFMYTOJXKLE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-azaniumyl-2-hydroxypropanoate Chemical compound NCC(O)C(O)=O BMYNFMYTOJXKLE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000003148 4 aminobutyric acid receptor blocking agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- DBKSSENEKWOVKL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-(methylamino)butan-1-ol Chemical compound CNCCCCO DBKSSENEKWOVKL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HZRGLMRBARSCHX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-amino-3-(1h-imidazol-2-yl)butanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CC(CN)C1=NC=CN1 HZRGLMRBARSCHX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CDFQDLUHBLZCGL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-azaniumyl-3-(5-chlorothiophen-2-yl)butanoate Chemical compound OC(=O)CC(CN)C1=CC=C(Cl)S1 CDFQDLUHBLZCGL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YURPXDJXGNHJIR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-azido-3-hydroxybutanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CC(O)CN=[N+]=[N-] YURPXDJXGNHJIR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GDRVFDDBLLKWRI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4H-quinolizine Chemical compound C1=CC=CN2CC=CC=C21 GDRVFDDBLLKWRI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RTAPDZBZLSXHQQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 8-methyl-3,7-dihydropurine-2,6-dione Chemical class N1C(=O)NC(=O)C2=C1N=C(C)N2 RTAPDZBZLSXHQQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 244000215068 Acacia senegal Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000006491 Acacia senegal Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-M Acrylate Chemical compound [O-]C(=O)C=C NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229940082496 Adrenoreceptor antagonist Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 208000008811 Agoraphobia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229910018173 Al—Al Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-O Ammonium Chemical compound [NH4+] QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-O 0.000 description 1
- NLXLAEXVIDQMFP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ammonium chloride Substances [NH4+].[Cl-] NLXLAEXVIDQMFP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VHUUQVKOLVNVRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ammonium hydroxide Chemical compound [NH4+].[OH-] VHUUQVKOLVNVRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010002859 Anxiety disorder due to a general medical condition Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 239000004475 Arginine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 241000416162 Astragalus gummifer Species 0.000 description 1
- 229940084657 Benzodiazepine receptor inverse agonist Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000005711 Benzoic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 241000283690 Bos taurus Species 0.000 description 1
- 229910014265 BrCl Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000002083 C09CA01 - Losartan Substances 0.000 description 1
- 101100479031 Caenorhabditis elegans aars-2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Calcium Chemical compound [Ca] OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BHPQYMZQTOCNFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Calcium cation Chemical compound [Ca+2] BHPQYMZQTOCNFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 244000284152 Carapichea ipecacuanha Species 0.000 description 1
- 208000024172 Cardiovascular disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- PTHCMJGKKRQCBF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Cellulose, microcrystalline Chemical compound OC1C(O)C(OC)OC(CO)C1OC1C(O)C(O)C(OC)C(CO)O1 PTHCMJGKKRQCBF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WBYWAXJHAXSJNI-SREVYHEPSA-N Cinnamic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)\C=C/C1=CC=CC=C1 WBYWAXJHAXSJNI-SREVYHEPSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010053398 Clonic convulsion Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 108020004635 Complementary DNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 206010010947 Coordination abnormal Diseases 0.000 description 1
- CMSMOCZEIVJLDB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Cyclophosphamide Chemical compound ClCCN(CCCl)P1(=O)NCCCO1 CMSMOCZEIVJLDB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FBPFZTCFMRRESA-FSIIMWSLSA-N D-Glucitol Natural products OC[C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)CO FBPFZTCFMRRESA-FSIIMWSLSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FBPFZTCFMRRESA-KVTDHHQDSA-N D-Mannitol Chemical compound OC[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](O)CO FBPFZTCFMRRESA-KVTDHHQDSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZAKOWWREFLAJOT-CEFNRUSXSA-N D-alpha-tocopherylacetate Chemical compound CC(=O)OC1=C(C)C(C)=C2O[C@@](CCC[C@H](C)CCC[C@H](C)CCCC(C)C)(C)CCC2=C1C ZAKOWWREFLAJOT-CEFNRUSXSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FBPFZTCFMRRESA-JGWLITMVSA-N D-glucitol Chemical compound OC[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](O)CO FBPFZTCFMRRESA-JGWLITMVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- COLNVLDHVKWLRT-MRVPVSSYSA-N D-phenylalanine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@H](N)CC1=CC=CC=C1 COLNVLDHVKWLRT-MRVPVSSYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000011767 DBA/2J (JAX™ mouse strain) Methods 0.000 description 1
- FEWJPZIEWOKRBE-JCYAYHJZSA-N Dextrotartaric acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)C(O)=O FEWJPZIEWOKRBE-JCYAYHJZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010052804 Drug tolerance Diseases 0.000 description 1
- GKQLYSROISKDLL-UHFFFAOYSA-N EEDQ Chemical compound C1=CC=C2N(C(=O)OCC)C(OCC)C=CC2=C1 GKQLYSROISKDLL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108090000790 Enzymes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004190 Enzymes Human genes 0.000 description 1
- LYCAIKOWRPUZTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylene glycol Chemical group OCCO LYCAIKOWRPUZTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PIICEJLVQHRZGT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylenediamine Chemical compound NCCN PIICEJLVQHRZGT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000282326 Felis catus Species 0.000 description 1
- 108091006027 G proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108090000045 G-Protein-Coupled Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000003688 G-Protein-Coupled Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 229940098788 GABA receptor antagonist Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000009508 GABAergic inhibition Effects 0.000 description 1
- 102000030782 GTP binding Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108091000058 GTP-Binding Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 206010061974 Gastrointestinal obstruction Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 108010010803 Gelatin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 208000011688 Generalised anxiety disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-GASJEMHNSA-N Glucose Natural products OC[C@H]1OC(O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H]1O WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-GASJEMHNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WHUUTDBJXJRKMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glutamic acid Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CCC(O)=O WHUUTDBJXJRKMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZWZWYGMENQVNFU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycerophosphorylserin Natural products OC(=O)C(N)COP(O)(=O)OCC(O)CO ZWZWYGMENQVNFU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ATFVTAOSZBVGHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycolaldehyde dimer Chemical compound OC1COC(O)CO1 ATFVTAOSZBVGHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920000084 Gum arabic Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000007821 HATU Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910004373 HOAc Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 241000282412 Homo Species 0.000 description 1
- OAKJQQAXSVQMHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrazine Chemical compound NN OAKJQQAXSVQMHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WRYCSMQKUKOKBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Imidazolidine Chemical compound C1CNCN1 WRYCSMQKUKOKBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 208000027601 Inner ear disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- ODKSFYDXXFIFQN-BYPYZUCNSA-P L-argininium(2+) Chemical compound NC(=[NH2+])NCCC[C@H]([NH3+])C(O)=O ODKSFYDXXFIFQN-BYPYZUCNSA-P 0.000 description 1
- HNDVDQJCIGZPNO-YFKPBYRVSA-N L-histidine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CN=CN1 HNDVDQJCIGZPNO-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KDXKERNSBIXSRK-YFKPBYRVSA-N L-lysine Chemical compound NCCCC[C@H](N)C(O)=O KDXKERNSBIXSRK-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005684 Liebig rearrangement reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- WHXSMMKQMYFTQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lithium Chemical compound [Li] WHXSMMKQMYFTQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KDXKERNSBIXSRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lysine Natural products NCCCCC(N)C(O)=O KDXKERNSBIXSRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004472 Lysine Substances 0.000 description 1
- FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Magnesium Chemical compound [Mg] FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229930195725 Mannitol Natural products 0.000 description 1
- NPPQSCRMBWNHMW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Meprobamate Chemical compound NC(=O)OCC(C)(CCC)COC(N)=O NPPQSCRMBWNHMW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 208000019695 Migraine disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 101100382264 Mus musculus Ca14 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101100113998 Mus musculus Cnbd2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101100112373 Mus musculus Ctsm gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 208000008238 Muscle Spasticity Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 235000009421 Myristica fragrans Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- FXHOOIRPVKKKFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N N,N-Dimethylacetamide Chemical compound CN(C)C(C)=O FXHOOIRPVKKKFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NQTADLQHYWFPDB-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-Hydroxysuccinimide Chemical compound ON1C(=O)CCC1=O NQTADLQHYWFPDB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UEEJHVSXFDXPFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-dimethylaminoethanol Chemical compound CN(C)CCO UEEJHVSXFDXPFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HTLZVHNRZJPSMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-ethylpiperidine Chemical compound CCN1CCCCC1 HTLZVHNRZJPSMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OPKOKAMJFNKNAS-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-methylethanolamine Chemical compound CNCCO OPKOKAMJFNKNAS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MECGOWOYLQKYGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N NCCCP(O)O.NCCCP(O)=O Chemical compound NCCCP(O)O.NCCCP(O)=O MECGOWOYLQKYGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000011785 NMRI mouse Methods 0.000 description 1
- 206010029350 Neurotoxicity Diseases 0.000 description 1
- GRYLNZFGIOXLOG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Nitric acid Chemical compound O[N+]([O-])=O GRYLNZFGIOXLOG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 208000021384 Obsessive-Compulsive disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 108010038109 Org 2766 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 206010052794 Panic disorder with agoraphobia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010033668 Panic disorder without agoraphobia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 235000019483 Peanut oil Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 206010034912 Phobia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- GMZVRMREEHBGGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Piracetam Chemical compound NC(=O)CN1CCCC1=O GMZVRMREEHBGGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920003171 Poly (ethylene oxide) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004952 Polyamide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002873 Polyethylenimine Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004721 Polyphenylene oxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000037 Polyproline Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 206010062519 Poor quality sleep Diseases 0.000 description 1
- ZLMJMSJWJFRBEC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Potassium Chemical compound [K] ZLMJMSJWJFRBEC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NPYPAHLBTDXSSS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Potassium ion Chemical compound [K+] NPYPAHLBTDXSSS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WUGQZFFCHPXWKQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Propanolamine Chemical compound NCCCO WUGQZFFCHPXWKQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000005700 Putrescine Substances 0.000 description 1
- WTKZEGDFNFYCGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyrazole Chemical compound C=1C=NNC=1 WTKZEGDFNFYCGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CZPWVGJYEJSRLH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyrimidine Chemical compound C1=CN=CN=C1 CZPWVGJYEJSRLH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IWYDHOAUDWTVEP-UHFFFAOYSA-N R-2-phenyl-2-hydroxyacetic acid Natural products OC(=O)C(O)C1=CC=CC=C1 IWYDHOAUDWTVEP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000007868 Raney catalyst Substances 0.000 description 1
- NPXOKRUENSOPAO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Raney nickel Chemical compound [Al].[Ni] NPXOKRUENSOPAO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910000564 Raney nickel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 241000700157 Rattus norvegicus Species 0.000 description 1
- 101100094962 Salmo salar salarin gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229920001800 Shellac Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 206010041250 Social phobia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- VMHLLURERBWHNL-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium acetate Chemical compound [Na+].CC([O-])=O VMHLLURERBWHNL-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 235000021355 Stearic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229930182558 Sterol Natural products 0.000 description 1
- KDYFGRWQOYBRFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Succinic acid Natural products OC(=O)CCC(O)=O KDYFGRWQOYBRFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FEWJPZIEWOKRBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tartaric acid Natural products [H+].[H+].[O-]C(=O)C(O)C(O)C([O-])=O FEWJPZIEWOKRBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010043994 Tonic convulsion Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010044221 Toxic encephalopathy Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229920001615 Tragacanth Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 208000031674 Traumatic Acute Stress disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010044565 Tremor Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010048010 Withdrawal syndrome Diseases 0.000 description 1
- CWRILEGKIAOYKP-SSDOTTSWSA-M [(2r)-3-acetyloxy-2-hydroxypropyl] 2-aminoethyl phosphate Chemical compound CC(=O)OC[C@@H](O)COP([O-])(=O)OCCN CWRILEGKIAOYKP-SSDOTTSWSA-M 0.000 description 1
- DGEZNRSVGBDHLK-UHFFFAOYSA-N [1,10]phenanthroline Chemical compound C1=CN=C2C3=NC=CC=C3C=CC2=C1 DGEZNRSVGBDHLK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XAKBSHICSHRJCL-UHFFFAOYSA-N [CH2]C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 Chemical group [CH2]C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 XAKBSHICSHRJCL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SMNRFWMNPDABKZ-WVALLCKVSA-N [[(2R,3S,4R,5S)-5-(2,6-dioxo-3H-pyridin-3-yl)-3,4-dihydroxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl] [[[(2R,3S,4S,5R,6R)-4-fluoro-3,5-dihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)oxan-2-yl]oxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-hydroxyphosphoryl] hydrogen phosphate Chemical compound OC[C@H]1O[C@H](OP(O)(=O)OP(O)(=O)OP(O)(=O)OP(O)(=O)OC[C@H]2O[C@H]([C@H](O)[C@@H]2O)C2C=CC(=O)NC2=O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](F)[C@@H]1O SMNRFWMNPDABKZ-WVALLCKVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000010521 absorption reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000010489 acacia gum Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000012346 acetyl chloride Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002777 acetyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C(*)=O 0.000 description 1
- 229940081735 acetylcellulose Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000001252 acrylic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000003213 activating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011149 active material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 208000026345 acute stress disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229940121359 adenosine receptor antagonist Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 102000030621 adenylate cyclase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108060000200 adenylate cyclase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229940009456 adriamycin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000002411 adverse Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000443 aerosol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001042 affinity chromatography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000016571 aggressive behavior Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013019 agitation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000010443 alginic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229920000615 alginic acid Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 150000001336 alkenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000004453 alkoxycarbonyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004466 alkoxycarbonylamino group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000003973 alkyl amines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000005431 alkyl carboxamide group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000005275 alkylenearyl group Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000003281 allosteric effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- BJEPYKJPYRNKOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N alpha-hydroxysuccinic acid Natural products OC(=O)C(O)CC(O)=O BJEPYKJPYRNKOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000004075 alteration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910000147 aluminium phosphate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 235000001014 amino acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 150000001413 amino acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910021529 ammonia Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- VZTDIZULWFCMLS-UHFFFAOYSA-N ammonium formate Chemical compound [NH4+].[O-]C=O VZTDIZULWFCMLS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000011114 ammonium hydroxide Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229940025084 amphetamine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000003321 amplification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940124326 anaesthetic agent Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000003444 anaesthetic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000005428 anthryl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C2C([H])=C3C(*)=C([H])C([H])=C([H])C3=C([H])C2=C1[H] 0.000 description 1
- 230000003496 anti-amnesic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000845 anti-microbial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003502 anti-nociceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011394 anticancer treatment Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940125681 anticonvulsant agent Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940005513 antidepressants Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940053200 antiepileptics fatty acid derivative Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000002246 antineoplastic agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000164 antipsychotic agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003434 antitussive agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940124584 antitussives Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000000338 anxiogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- VMWNQDUVQKEIOC-CYBMUJFWSA-N apomorphine Chemical compound C([C@H]1N(C)CC2)C3=CC=C(O)C(O)=C3C3=C1C2=CC=C3 VMWNQDUVQKEIOC-CYBMUJFWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960004046 apomorphine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000012736 aqueous medium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000008346 aqueous phase Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007864 aqueous solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003125 aqueous solvent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007900 aqueous suspension Substances 0.000 description 1
- ODKSFYDXXFIFQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N arginine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CCCNC(N)=N ODKSFYDXXFIFQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960003121 arginine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000004982 aromatic amines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000001502 aryl halides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 208000006673 asthma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- HSWPZIDYAHLZDD-UHFFFAOYSA-N atipamezole Chemical compound C1C2=CC=CC=C2CC1(CC)C1=CN=CN1 HSWPZIDYAHLZDD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960003002 atipamezole Drugs 0.000 description 1
- HNYOPLTXPVRDBG-UHFFFAOYSA-M barbiturate Chemical compound O=C1CC(=O)[N-]C(=O)N1 HNYOPLTXPVRDBG-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 239000011324 bead Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000755 benzodiazepine receptor inverse stimulating agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000759 benzodiazepine receptor stimulating agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010233 benzoic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 125000004196 benzothienyl group Chemical group S1C(=CC2=C1C=CC=C2)* 0.000 description 1
- RROBIDXNTUAHFW-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzotriazol-1-yloxy-tris(dimethylamino)phosphanium Chemical compound C1=CC=C2N(O[P+](N(C)C)(N(C)C)N(C)C)N=NC2=C1 RROBIDXNTUAHFW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NBQLPCSVDWPHAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzyl n-[6-(methylamino)hexyl]carbamate Chemical compound CNCCCCCCNC(=O)OCC1=CC=CC=C1 NBQLPCSVDWPHAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001584 benzyloxycarbonyl group Chemical group C(=O)(OCC1=CC=CC=C1)* 0.000 description 1
- MSWZFWKMSRAUBD-UHFFFAOYSA-N beta-D-galactosamine Natural products NC1C(O)OC(CO)C(O)C1O MSWZFWKMSRAUBD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-VFUOTHLCSA-N beta-D-glucose Chemical compound OC[C@H]1O[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H]1O WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-VFUOTHLCSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960003237 betaine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- IYGYMKDQCDOMRE-ZWKOTPCHSA-N bicuculline Chemical compound O([C@H]1[C@@H]2C3=CC=4OCOC=4C=C3CCN2C)C(=O)C2=C1C=CC1=C2OCO1 IYGYMKDQCDOMRE-ZWKOTPCHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000001588 bifunctional effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010876 biochemical test Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000013060 biological fluid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000000319 biphenyl-4-yl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C([H])C([H])=C1C1=C([H])C([H])=C([*])C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 1
- 230000008499 blood brain barrier function Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000001218 blood-brain barrier Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000036760 body temperature Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000005620 boronic acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- LWUDDYHYYNNIQI-ZDUSSCGKSA-N bretazenil Chemical compound O=C1C2=C(Br)C=CC=C2N2C=NC(C(=O)OC(C)(C)C)=C2[C@@H]2CCCN21 LWUDDYHYYNNIQI-ZDUSSCGKSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229950010832 bretazenil Drugs 0.000 description 1
- CODNYICXDISAEA-UHFFFAOYSA-N bromine monochloride Chemical compound BrCl CODNYICXDISAEA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052794 bromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 244000309464 bull Species 0.000 description 1
- 239000001273 butane Substances 0.000 description 1
- KDYFGRWQOYBRFD-NUQCWPJISA-N butanedioic acid Chemical compound O[14C](=O)CC[14C](O)=O KDYFGRWQOYBRFD-NUQCWPJISA-N 0.000 description 1
- FJDQFPXHSGXQBY-UHFFFAOYSA-L caesium carbonate Chemical compound [Cs+].[Cs+].[O-]C([O-])=O FJDQFPXHSGXQBY-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 229910000024 caesium carbonate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011575 calcium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052791 calcium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910001424 calcium ion Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000001506 calcium phosphate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910000389 calcium phosphate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 235000011010 calcium phosphates Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000378 calcium silicate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052918 calcium silicate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229960003340 calcium silicate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000012241 calcium silicate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- OYACROKNLOSFPA-UHFFFAOYSA-N calcium;dioxido(oxo)silane Chemical compound [Ca+2].[O-][Si]([O-])=O OYACROKNLOSFPA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940054025 carbamate anxiolytics Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000004657 carbamic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 235000013877 carbamide Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 125000003917 carbamoyl group Chemical group [H]N([H])C(*)=O 0.000 description 1
- 125000002837 carbocyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000001718 carbodiimides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 235000014633 carbohydrates Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 150000001721 carbon Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000003857 carboxamides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000007942 carboxylates Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229940082638 cardiac stimulant phosphodiesterase inhibitors Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 210000005056 cell body Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229920002301 cellulose acetate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 208000015114 central nervous system disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229960000541 cetyl alcohol Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000001311 chemical methods and process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007795 chemical reaction product Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052801 chlorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 125000002668 chloroacetyl group Chemical group ClCC(=O)* 0.000 description 1
- ZPEIMTDSQAKGNT-UHFFFAOYSA-N chlorpromazine Chemical compound C1=C(Cl)C=C2N(CCCN(C)C)C3=CC=CC=C3SC2=C1 ZPEIMTDSQAKGNT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960001076 chlorpromazine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- OEYIOHPDSNJKLS-UHFFFAOYSA-N choline Chemical compound C[N+](C)(C)CCO OEYIOHPDSNJKLS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960001231 choline Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000000064 cholinergic agonist Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940127243 cholinergic drug Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000001713 cholinergic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000013985 cinnamic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229930016911 cinnamic acid Natural products 0.000 description 1
- WCZVZNOTHYJIEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N cinnoline Chemical compound N1=NC=CC2=CC=CC=C21 WCZVZNOTHYJIEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DQLATGHUWYMOKM-UHFFFAOYSA-L cisplatin Chemical compound N[Pt](N)(Cl)Cl DQLATGHUWYMOKM-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 229960004316 cisplatin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000015165 citric acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000002566 clonic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010367 cloning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003240 coconut oil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000019864 coconut oil Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000019771 cognition Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000010877 cognitive disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229940075614 colloidal silicon dioxide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000002860 competitive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002299 complementary DNA Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940126142 compound 16 Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940125877 compound 31 Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940127573 compound 38 Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000000205 computational method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000039 congener Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- ARUVKPQLZAKDPS-UHFFFAOYSA-L copper(II) sulfate Chemical compound [Cu+2].[O-][S+2]([O-])([O-])[O-] ARUVKPQLZAKDPS-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 210000005257 cortical tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 235000012343 cottonseed oil Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000002385 cottonseed oil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000009223 counseling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000006165 cyclic alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- YPHMISFOHDHNIV-FSZOTQKASA-N cycloheximide Chemical compound C1[C@@H](C)C[C@H](C)C(=O)[C@@H]1[C@H](O)CC1CC(=O)NC(=O)C1 YPHMISFOHDHNIV-FSZOTQKASA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000000113 cyclohexyl group Chemical group [H]C1([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])C1([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000000640 cyclooctyl group Chemical group [H]C1([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C1([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000001511 cyclopentyl group Chemical group [H]C1([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C1([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 229960004397 cyclophosphamide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000001559 cyclopropyl group Chemical group [H]C1([H])C([H])([H])C1([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 230000003001 depressive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229960000632 dexamfetamine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000008121 dextrose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000005265 dialkylamine group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000005432 dialkylcarboxamide group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000005266 diarylamine group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000001991 dicarboxylic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 235000014113 dietary fatty acids Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- HPNMFZURTQLUMO-UHFFFAOYSA-N diethylamine Chemical compound CCNCC HPNMFZURTQLUMO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000005442 diisocyanate group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000005594 diketone group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000010494 dissociation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005593 dissociations Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000002228 disulfide group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000004662 dithiols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229950002268 divaplon Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000001647 drug administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940112141 dry powder inhaler Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 210000001198 duodenum Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000008157 edible vegetable oil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001971 elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000008030 elimination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003379 elimination reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003995 emulsifying agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001804 emulsifying effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000839 emulsion Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002702 enteric coating Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000007613 environmental effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002255 enzymatic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006911 enzymatic reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- CCIVGXIOQKPBKL-UHFFFAOYSA-M ethanesulfonate Chemical compound CCS([O-])(=O)=O CCIVGXIOQKPBKL-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- IDGUHHHQCWSQLU-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethanol;hydrate Chemical compound O.CCO IDGUHHHQCWSQLU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000005678 ethenylene group Chemical group [H]C([*:1])=C([H])[*:2] 0.000 description 1
- GWNFQAKCJYEJEW-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethyl 3-[8-[[4-methyl-5-[(3-methyl-4-oxophthalazin-1-yl)methyl]-1,2,4-triazol-3-yl]sulfanyl]octanoylamino]benzoate Chemical compound CCOC(=O)C1=CC(NC(=O)CCCCCCCSC2=NN=C(CC3=NN(C)C(=O)C4=CC=CC=C34)N2C)=CC=C1 GWNFQAKCJYEJEW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RJLZSKYNYLYCNY-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethyl carbamate;isocyanic acid Chemical compound N=C=O.CCOC(N)=O RJLZSKYNYLYCNY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940012017 ethylenediamine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000002534 ethynyl group Chemical group [H]C#C* 0.000 description 1
- 238000001704 evaporation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008020 evaporation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005284 excitation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002474 experimental method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000021824 exploration behavior Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000605 extraction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000494 facilitatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003925 fat Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000019197 fats Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000194 fatty acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229930195729 fatty acid Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 150000004665 fatty acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 210000003608 fece Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012054 flavored emulsion Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000020375 flavoured syrup Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- NYSDRDDQELAVKP-SFHVURJKSA-N flesinoxan Chemical compound C([C@@H](O1)CO)OC2=C1C=CC=C2N(CC1)CCN1CCNC(=O)C1=CC=C(F)C=C1 NYSDRDDQELAVKP-SFHVURJKSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229950003678 flesinoxan Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 description 1
- OFBIFZUFASYYRE-UHFFFAOYSA-N flumazenil Chemical compound C1N(C)C(=O)C2=CC(F)=CC=C2N2C=NC(C(=O)OCC)=C21 OFBIFZUFASYYRE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960004381 flumazenil Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000001153 fluoro group Chemical group F* 0.000 description 1
- 235000013355 food flavoring agent Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 235000003599 food sweetener Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 125000002485 formyl group Chemical group [H]C(*)=O 0.000 description 1
- 238000004108 freeze drying Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000001530 fumaric acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000011087 fumaric acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003371 gabaergic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940083124 ganglion-blocking antiadrenergic secondary and tertiary amines Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000005176 gastrointestinal motility Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000001035 gastrointestinal tract Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229920000159 gelatin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000008273 gelatin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940014259 gelatin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000019322 gelatine Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 235000011852 gelatine desserts Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000007429 general method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 208000029364 generalized anxiety disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229960002442 glucosamine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000013922 glutamic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000004220 glutamic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000000291 glutamic acid group Chemical group N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)* 0.000 description 1
- 150000002339 glycosphingolipids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000010243 gut motility Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000026781 habituation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960003878 haloperidol Drugs 0.000 description 1
- RERZNCLIYCABFS-UHFFFAOYSA-N harmaline Chemical compound C1CN=C(C)C2=C1C1=CC=C(OC)C=C1N2 RERZNCLIYCABFS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010019692 hepatic necrosis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 125000005241 heteroarylamino group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- HNDVDQJCIGZPNO-UHFFFAOYSA-N histidine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CN=CN1 HNDVDQJCIGZPNO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960002885 histidine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- XGIHQYAWBCFNPY-AZOCGYLKSA-N hydrabamine Chemical compound C([C@@H]12)CC3=CC(C(C)C)=CC=C3[C@@]2(C)CCC[C@@]1(C)CNCCNC[C@@]1(C)[C@@H]2CCC3=CC(C(C)C)=CC=C3[C@@]2(C)CCC1 XGIHQYAWBCFNPY-AZOCGYLKSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000004678 hydrides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229930195733 hydrocarbon Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 208000013403 hyperactivity Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 150000005238 imidazo[1,2-a]pyrimidines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- MTNDZQHUAFNZQY-UHFFFAOYSA-N imidazoline Chemical compound C1CN=CN1 MTNDZQHUAFNZQY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000002163 immunogen Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001771 impaired effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000338 in vitro Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000099 in vitro assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005462 in vivo assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 208000016290 incoordination Diseases 0.000 description 1
- PZOUSPYUWWUPPK-UHFFFAOYSA-N indole Natural products CC1=CC=CC2=C1C=CN2 PZOUSPYUWWUPPK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RKJUIXBNRJVNHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N indolenine Natural products C1=CC=C2CC=NC2=C1 RKJUIXBNRJVNHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HOBCFUWDNJPFHB-UHFFFAOYSA-N indolizine Chemical compound C1=CC=CN2C=CC=C21 HOBCFUWDNJPFHB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000003406 indolizinyl group Chemical group C=1(C=CN2C=CC=CC12)* 0.000 description 1
- 239000011261 inert gas Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012442 inert solvent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001802 infusion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003112 inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007689 inspection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011835 investigation Methods 0.000 description 1
- PNDPGZBMCMUPRI-UHFFFAOYSA-N iodine Chemical compound II PNDPGZBMCMUPRI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960005208 ipecacuanha Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 208000002551 irritable bowel syndrome Diseases 0.000 description 1
- JJWLVOIRVHMVIS-UHFFFAOYSA-N isopropylamine Chemical compound CC(C)N JJWLVOIRVHMVIS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZLTPDFXIESTBQG-UHFFFAOYSA-N isothiazole Chemical compound C=1C=NSC=1 ZLTPDFXIESTBQG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CTAPFRYPJLPFDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N isoxazole Chemical compound C=1C=NOC=1 CTAPFRYPJLPFDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000009191 jumping Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000002596 lactones Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002502 liposome Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011344 liquid material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005567 liquid scintillation counting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052744 lithium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 231100000149 liver necrosis Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000006742 locomotor activity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960004391 lorazepam Drugs 0.000 description 1
- KJJZZJSZUJXYEA-UHFFFAOYSA-N losartan Chemical compound CCCCC1=NC(Cl)=C(CO)N1CC1=CC=C(C=2C(=CC=CC=2)C=2[N]N=NN=2)C=C1 KJJZZJSZUJXYEA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960004773 losartan Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000007937 lozenge Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000314 lubricant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229960003646 lysine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000001115 mace Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052749 magnesium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 159000000003 magnesium salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-UPHRSURJSA-N maleic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)\C=C/C(O)=O VZCYOOQTPOCHFL-UPHRSURJSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000011976 maleic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000001630 malic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000011090 malic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229960002510 mandelic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000000594 mannitol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010355 mannitol Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- HAWPXGHAZFHHAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N mechlorethamine Chemical compound ClCCN(C)CCCl HAWPXGHAZFHHAD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960004961 mechlorethamine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 206010027175 memory impairment Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000006993 memory improvement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960004815 meprobamate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000002503 metabolic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910021645 metal ion Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229940098779 methanesulfonic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- GADIKQPUNWAMEB-UHFFFAOYSA-N methyl 4-ethyl-6,7-dimethoxy-9H-pyrido[5,4-b]indole-3-carboxylate Chemical compound N1C2=CC(OC)=C(OC)C=C2C2=C1C=NC(C(=O)OC)=C2CC GADIKQPUNWAMEB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920000609 methyl cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- WBYWAXJHAXSJNI-UHFFFAOYSA-N methyl p-hydroxycinnamate Natural products OC(=O)C=CC1=CC=CC=C1 WBYWAXJHAXSJNI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000001923 methylcellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010981 methylcellulose Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229960003793 midazolam Drugs 0.000 description 1
- DDLIGBOFAVUZHB-UHFFFAOYSA-N midazolam Chemical compound C12=CC(Cl)=CC=C2N2C(C)=NC=C2CN=C1C1=CC=CC=C1F DDLIGBOFAVUZHB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010027599 migraine Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 238000003801 milling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002480 mineral oil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010446 mineral oil Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000329 molecular dynamics simulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000002950 monocyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004573 morpholin-4-yl group Chemical group N1(CCOCC1)* 0.000 description 1
- 230000004973 motor coordination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007659 motor function Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010172 mouse model Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940035363 muscle relaxants Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000001421 myristyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- KJHGVXJHOBEHIH-UHFFFAOYSA-N n',n'-dimethyloctane-1,8-diamine Chemical compound CN(C)CCCCCCCCN KJHGVXJHOBEHIH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ADAMEOZKZQRNKP-UHFFFAOYSA-N n'-propylmethanediimine Chemical compound CCCN=C=N ADAMEOZKZQRNKP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PSHKMPUSSFXUIA-UHFFFAOYSA-N n,n-dimethylpyridin-2-amine Chemical compound CN(C)C1=CC=CC=N1 PSHKMPUSSFXUIA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SYSQUGFVNFXIIT-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-[4-(1,3-benzoxazol-2-yl)phenyl]-4-nitrobenzenesulfonamide Chemical class C1=CC([N+](=O)[O-])=CC=C1S(=O)(=O)NC1=CC=C(C=2OC3=CC=CC=C3N=2)C=C1 SYSQUGFVNFXIIT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IJDNQMDRQITEOD-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-butane Chemical class CCCC IJDNQMDRQITEOD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001280 n-hexyl group Chemical group C(CCCCC)* 0.000 description 1
- OFBQJSOFQDEBGM-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-pentane Natural products CCCCC OFBQJSOFQDEBGM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004123 n-propyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- IOMMMLWIABWRKL-WUTDNEBXSA-N nazartinib Chemical compound C1N(C(=O)/C=C/CN(C)C)CCCC[C@H]1N1C2=C(Cl)C=CC=C2N=C1NC(=O)C1=CC=NC(C)=C1 IOMMMLWIABWRKL-WUTDNEBXSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 210000000478 neocortex Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000001640 nerve ending Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000001722 neurochemical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007971 neurological deficit Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007135 neurotoxicity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 231100000228 neurotoxicity Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000003957 neurotransmitter release Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910017604 nitric acid Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000009871 nonspecific binding Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003199 nucleic acid amplification method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010534 nucleophilic substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- QIQXTHQIDYTFRH-UHFFFAOYSA-N octadecanoic acid Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(O)=O QIQXTHQIDYTFRH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OQCDKBAXFALNLD-UHFFFAOYSA-N octadecanoic acid Natural products CCCCCCCC(C)CCCCCCCCC(O)=O OQCDKBAXFALNLD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000012053 oil suspension Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002674 ointment Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001542 oligosaccharide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 150000002482 oligosaccharides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- PIDFDZJZLOTZTM-KHVQSSSXSA-N ombitasvir Chemical compound COC(=O)N[C@@H](C(C)C)C(=O)N1CCC[C@H]1C(=O)NC1=CC=C([C@H]2N([C@@H](CC2)C=2C=CC(NC(=O)[C@H]3N(CCC3)C(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)OC)C(C)C)=CC=2)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)C(C)(C)C)C=C1 PIDFDZJZLOTZTM-KHVQSSSXSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000012346 open field test Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000014 opioid analgesic Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940005483 opioid analgesics Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000005457 optimization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000006408 oxalic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000003647 oxidation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007254 oxidation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000006353 oxyethylene group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004430 oxygen atom Chemical group O* 0.000 description 1
- HIUPRQPBWVEQJJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N pagoclone Chemical compound C1=CC(Cl)=NC2=NC(N3C(C4=CC=CC=C4C3=O)CC(=O)CCC(C)C)=CC=C21 HIUPRQPBWVEQJJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229950002286 pagoclone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- FJKROLUGYXJWQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N papa-hydroxy-benzoic acid Natural products OC(=O)C1=CC=C(O)C=C1 FJKROLUGYXJWQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000312 peanut oil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000035515 penetration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012026 peptide coupling reagents Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000002989 phenols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229950000688 phenothiazine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000008104 phosphatidylethanolamines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000003905 phosphatidylinositols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000002571 phosphodiesterase inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 1
- UHZYTMXLRWXGPK-UHFFFAOYSA-N phosphorus pentachloride Chemical compound ClP(Cl)(Cl)(Cl)Cl UHZYTMXLRWXGPK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LFSXCDWNBUNEEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N phthalazine Chemical compound C1=NN=CC2=CC=CC=C21 LFSXCDWNBUNEEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000004962 physiological condition Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960004526 piracetam Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000002574 poison Substances 0.000 description 1
- 231100000614 poison Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 229920002647 polyamide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000768 polyamine Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000570 polyether Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920005862 polyol Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000003077 polyols Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229920001184 polypeptide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 108010026466 polyproline Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 208000028173 post-traumatic stress disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000002980 postoperative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011591 potassium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052700 potassium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910001414 potassium ion Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- OXCMYAYHXIHQOA-UHFFFAOYSA-N potassium;[2-butyl-5-chloro-3-[[4-[2-(1,2,4-triaza-3-azanidacyclopenta-1,4-dien-5-yl)phenyl]phenyl]methyl]imidazol-4-yl]methanol Chemical compound [K+].CCCCC1=NC(Cl)=C(CO)N1CC1=CC=C(C=2C(=CC=CC=2)C2=N[N-]N=N2)C=C1 OXCMYAYHXIHQOA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000035935 pregnancy Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003755 preservative agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003518 presynaptic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000003141 primary amines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- MFDFERRIHVXMIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N procaine Chemical compound CCN(CC)CCOC(=O)C1=CC=C(N)C=C1 MFDFERRIHVXMIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960004919 procaine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000002325 prokinetic agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002035 prolonged effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- BDERNNFJNOPAEC-UHFFFAOYSA-N propan-1-ol Chemical compound CCCO BDERNNFJNOPAEC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YORCIIVHUBAYBQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N propargyl bromide Chemical compound BrCC#C YORCIIVHUBAYBQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000006410 propenylene group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 235000019260 propionic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 125000001436 propyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 125000004805 propylene group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([*:1])C([H])([H])[*:2] 0.000 description 1
- 210000004129 prosencephalon Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 208000020016 psychiatric disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229940035680 psychoanaleptics Drugs 0.000 description 1
- CPNGPNLZQNNVQM-UHFFFAOYSA-N pteridine Chemical compound N1=CN=CC2=NC=CN=C21 CPNGPNLZQNNVQM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000000541 pulsatile effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000008213 purified water Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000296 purinergic P1 receptor antagonist Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000003212 purines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- PBMFSQRYOILNGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyridazine Chemical compound C1=CC=NN=C1 PBMFSQRYOILNGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000000168 pyrrolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229940107700 pyruvic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- JWVCLYRUEFBMGU-UHFFFAOYSA-N quinazoline Chemical compound N1=CN=CC2=CC=CC=C21 JWVCLYRUEFBMGU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IUVKMZGDUIUOCP-BTNSXGMBSA-N quinbolone Chemical compound O([C@H]1CC[C@H]2[C@H]3[C@@H]([C@]4(C=CC(=O)C=C4CC3)C)CC[C@@]21C)C1=CCCC1 IUVKMZGDUIUOCP-BTNSXGMBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SBYHFKPVCBCYGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N quinuclidine Chemical compound C1CC2CCN1CC2 SBYHFKPVCBCYGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000002285 radioactive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002287 radioligand Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011552 rat model Methods 0.000 description 1
- RHZDHINXKVZTEF-UHFFFAOYSA-N razobazam Chemical compound O=C1CC(=O)N(C)C2=NNC(C)=C2N1C1=CC=CC=C1 RHZDHINXKVZTEF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940044551 receptor antagonist Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000002464 receptor antagonist Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001525 receptor binding assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001953 recrystallisation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000011514 reflex Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010992 reflux Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000011160 research Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000241 respiratory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000029058 respiratory gaseous exchange Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000717 retained effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000001525 retina Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229960004889 salicylic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 description 1
- WSDBAFQWNWJTNG-UHFFFAOYSA-N sarmazenil Chemical compound C1N(C)C(=O)C2=C(Cl)C=CC=C2N2C=NC(C(=O)OCC)=C21 WSDBAFQWNWJTNG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229950003722 sarmazenil Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000003335 secondary amines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229940125723 sedative agent Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000004799 sedative–hypnotic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012056 semi-solid material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000008159 sesame oil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000011803 sesame oil Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000004208 shellac Substances 0.000 description 1
- ZLGIYFNHBLSMPS-ATJNOEHPSA-N shellac Chemical compound OCCCCCC(O)C(O)CCCCCCCC(O)=O.C1C23[C@H](C(O)=O)CCC2[C@](C)(CO)[C@@H]1C(C(O)=O)=C[C@@H]3O ZLGIYFNHBLSMPS-ATJNOEHPSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940113147 shellac Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000013874 shellac Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 210000002027 skeletal muscle Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 101150115956 slc25a26 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 150000003384 small molecules Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000001632 sodium acetate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000017281 sodium acetate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- QDRKDTQENPPHOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N sodium ethoxide Chemical compound [Na+].CC[O-] QDRKDTQENPPHOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000011343 solid material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000007790 solid phase Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000600 sorbitol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010356 sorbitol Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 208000018198 spasticity Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 201000001716 specific phobia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 210000000273 spinal nerve root Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000013222 sprague-dawley male rat Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000008117 stearic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012058 sterile packaged powder Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003637 steroidlike Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000003432 sterols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 235000003702 sterols Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000000638 stimulation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000002784 stomach Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000012089 stop solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010254 subcutaneous injection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000005156 substituted alkylene group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000003456 sulfonamides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000006228 supernatant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000375 suspending agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002459 sustained effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003765 sweetening agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000009182 swimming Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000000225 synapse Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000009897 systematic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940066769 systemic antihistamines substituted alkylamines Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000009885 systemic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000007916 tablet composition Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011975 tartaric acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000002906 tartaric acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- BNWCETAHAJSBFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N tert-butyl 2-bromoacetate Chemical compound CC(C)(C)OC(=O)CBr BNWCETAHAJSBFG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000005931 tert-butyloxycarbonyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C(OC(*)=O)(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 238000010998 test method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000003718 tetrahydrofuranyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229960004559 theobromine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940124597 therapeutic agent Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000002560 therapeutic procedure Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000007970 thio esters Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000003396 thiol group Chemical group [H]S* 0.000 description 1
- 239000012049 topical pharmaceutical composition Substances 0.000 description 1
- 231100000331 toxic Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000002588 toxic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 231100000027 toxicology Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 239000003053 toxin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 231100000765 toxin Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 108700012359 toxins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 235000010487 tragacanth Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000196 tragacanth Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940116362 tragacanth Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000037317 transdermal delivery Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000018405 transmission of nerve impulse Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000003626 triacylglycerols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000005259 triarylamine group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- QORWJWZARLRLPR-UHFFFAOYSA-H tricalcium bis(phosphate) Chemical compound [Ca+2].[Ca+2].[Ca+2].[O-]P([O-])([O-])=O.[O-]P([O-])([O-])=O QORWJWZARLRLPR-UHFFFAOYSA-H 0.000 description 1
- YFTHZRPMJXBUME-UHFFFAOYSA-N tripropylamine Chemical compound CCCN(CCC)CCC YFTHZRPMJXBUME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960000281 trometamol Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229950011472 umespirone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000009827 uniform distribution Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000003672 ureas Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000003828 vacuum filtration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000003462 vein Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 208000027491 vestibular disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000009935 visceral pain Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000002747 voluntary effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000004584 weight gain Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000019786 weight gain Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000080 wetting agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000002268 wool Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000002424 x-ray crystallography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229950004681 zacopride Drugs 0.000 description 1
Landscapes
- Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
- Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)
- Organic Low-Molecular-Weight Compounds And Preparation Thereof (AREA)
Description
MULTIVALENT AGONISTS, PARTIAL AGONISTS - AND ANTAGONISTS OF THE GABA RECEPTORS
Field of the I .
This invention relates to novel compounds which selectively bind to GABA receptors. This invention also relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising such compounds. It further relates to the use of such compounds in treating anxiety, panic disorders, depression, sleep and seizure disorders, overdoses of benzodiazepine-type drugs, and emesis, for producing sedation, hypnosis, retrograde amnesia and enhancing alertness and memory.
State of the Art
A large number of patients suffer from anxiety and related disorders. These disorders include panic disorder without agoraphobia, panic disorder with agoraphobia, agoraphobia without history of panic disorder, specific phobia, social phobia, obsessive-compulsive disorder, post-traumatic stress disorder, acute stress disorder, generalized anxiety disorder, anxiety disorder due to a general medical condition, substance-induced anxiety disorder and anxiety disorders not otherwise specified. Anxiety disorders are generally treated with counseling and/or drugs.
In the central nervous system (CNS), the transmission of nerve impulses is controlled by the interaction between neurotransmitters released by a sending neuron and surface receptors on receiving neurons. This interaction causes excitation of the receiving neuron. Research efforts have focused on developing compounds which interact with the various receptors in the central nervous system to treat or.prevent anxiety and related disorders. ’
Y-Aminobutyric acid (GABA) is a major inhibitory amino acid transmitter in the mammalian brain. (Roberts & Frankel, L Biol. Chem. 187: 55-63, 1950;
Udenfriend, L Biol. Chem., 187: 65-69, 1950). GABA has been implicated in the etiology of seizure disorders, sleep, anxicty and cognition (Tallman and Gallager, )
Ann. Rev. Neuroscience, 8: 21-44, 1985).
GABA, which is widely, although unequally, distributed through the mammalian brain, is a transmitter at approximately 30% of the synapses in the brain. In most regions of the brain, GABA is associated with local inhibitory neurons and only in two regions, GABA is associated with longer projections.
GABA mediates many of its actions through a complex of proteins localized both on cell bodies and nerve endings; these are the GABA, receptors. Postsynaptic responses to GABA are ‘mediated through alterations in chloride conductance that generally, although not invariably, lead to hyperpolarization of the cell. The complex of proteins associated with postsynaptic GABA responses is a major site of action for a number of structurally unrelated compounds capable of modifying postsynaptic responses to GABA. Depending on the mode of interaction, these compounds are capable of producing a spectrum of activities (either sedative, anxiolytic, and anticonvulsant, or wakefulness, scizurcs, and anxiety). 1,4-Benzodiazepines are widely used to treat anxiety and rclated disorders.
Examples of benzodiazepines include chlordiazepoxide, diazepam, flurazepam, and triazolam. These compounds are used as anxiolytics, sedative-hypnotics, muscle relaxants, and anticonvulsants. A major action of benzodiazepines is enhancement of GABAergic inhibition. The benzodiazepines enhance presynaptic inhibition of a monosynaptic ventral root reflex, a GABA-mediated event (Schmidt et al., Arch, Exp. Path. Pharmakol. 258: 69-82 (1967)); Tallman et al., Science, 207: 274-81 (1980), Haefley et al., Handb. Exptl, Pharmacol. 33: 95-102 (1981).
As the nature of the interaction between GABA and the benzodiazepines ’ has become understood, it appears that the behaviorally important interactions of the benzodiazepines with different neurotransmitter systems are due in a large part : to the enhanced ability of GABA itself to modify these systems. Each modified system, in turn, may be associated with the expression of a behavior.
GABA and related analogs can interact with low affinity (1 mM) at the
GABA binding site to enhance the binding of benzodiazepines to the clonazepame-sensitive site (Tallman et al., Nature, 274: 383-85 (1978)). This enhancement is caused by an increase in the affinity of the benzodiazepine binding site due to occupancy of the GABA site. Both GABA and benzodiazepine sites are allosterically linked in the membrane as part of a complex of proteins. For a number of GABA analdgs, the ability to enhance diazepam binding by 50% of maximum and the ability to inhibit the binding of GABA to brain membranes by 50% can be directly correlated. For example, enhancement of benzodiazepine binding by GABA agonists is blocked by the GABA receptor antagonist (+) bicuculline (Tallman et al., Nature, 274: 383-85 (1978).
There are multiple "isoreceptor” or allelic forms of the GABA receptor (Tallman & Gallager, Ann, Rev. Neurosci. 8, 21-44 (1985)). Isoreceptors are believed to be important in the etiology of psychiatric disorders.
The GABA, receptor subunits have been cloned from bovine and human cDNA libraries. A number of distinct cDNAs have been identified as subunits of the GABA, receptor complex by cloning and expression. These are categorized into a, B, & and €, and provide a molecular basis for the GABA, receptor heterogeneity and distinctive regional pharmacology. The y-subunit appears to enable drugs like benzodiazepines to modify the GABA responses. The presence of low Hill coefficients in the binding of ligands to the GABA , receptor indicates unique profiles of subtype specific pharmacological action.
Drugs that interact at the GABA, receptor can possess a spectrum of pharmacological activities depending on their abilities to modify the actions of )
GABA. For cxample, the beta-carbolines were first isolated based upon their ability to inhibit competitively the binding of diazepam to its binding site (Nielsen : etal, Life Sci, 25: 679-86 (1979)). The receptor binding assay is not totally predictive about the biological activity of such compounds; agonists, partial - agonists, inverse agonists, and antagonists can inhibit binding.
For example, compounds such as beta-carbolines and analogs thereof can antagonize the actions of diazepam behaviorally (Tenen & Hirsch, Nature, 288: 609-10 (1980)). Beta-carbolines possess intrinsic activity of their own opposite to that of the benzodiazepines, and are therefore known as inverse agonists.
A number of compounds, such as imidazodiazepine (Hunkeler etal,
Nature, 290: 514-516 (1981)), are specific antagonists of the benzodiazepine receptor, and are able to inhibit the binding of benzodiazepines. Imidazodiazepine is a high affinity competitive inhibitor of benzodiazepine and beta-carboline binding and can block the pharmacological actions of both these classes of compounds. By itself, it possesses little intrinsic pharmacological activity in animals and humans (Hunkeler et al., Nature, 290: 514-16 (1981); Darragh ct al..
Eur. I Clin. Pharmacol. 14: 569-70 (1983)). This compound is the ligand of choice for binding to GABA, receptors because it does not possess receptor subtype specificity and measures each state of the receptor.
Compounds possessing activity similar to the benzodiazepines are called agonists. Compounds possessing activity opposite to benzodiazepines are called inverse agonists, and the compounds blocking both types of activity have been termed antagonists. This categorization has been developed to emphasize the fact that a wide variety of compounds can produce a spectrum of pharmacological effects, to indicate that compounds can interact at the same receptor to produce opposite effects, and to indicate that beta-carbolines and antagonists with intrinsic : anxiogenic effects are not synonymous. A biochemical test for the pharmacological and behavioral properties of compounds that interact with the benzodiazepine . receptor continues to emphasize the interaction with the GABAergic system. In contrast to the benzodiazepines, which show an increase in their affinity due to
GABA (Tallman et al., Nature, 274: 383-85 (1978), Tallman et al., Science, 207: 274-81 (1980)), compounds with antagonist properties show little GABA shift (i.e., change in receptor affinity due to GABA) (Mohler & Richards Nature, 294: 763-65 (1981)), and the inversc agonists actually show a decrease in affinity due to
GABA (Braestrup & Nielson Nature, 294: 472-474 (1981)). Thus, the GABA shift predicts generally the expected behavioral properties of the compounds. : It would be advantageous to develop new compounds for interacting with the GABA receptors. The present invention provides such compounds.
Advantages include increased potency, increased selectivity for GABA A Stotpes. controlled cfficience, i.e., partial agonist.
This invention is directed to novel multibinding compounds (agents) that are agonists, partial agonists, inverse agonists and antagonists of the GABA receptors. The multibinding compounds of this invention are useful in the . treatment and prevention of disorders mediated by the GABA receptors, for example, treating and preventing anxiety, depression, sleep and seizure disorders, overdoses of benzodiazepine-type drugs, and emesis, and enhancing alertness and memory.
Accordingly, in one of its composition aspects, this invention provides a multibinding compound comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers wherein each of said ligands independently comprises an agonist, partial agonist, inverse agonist and antagonist of the GABA receptors, and pharmaceutically-acceptable salts thereof.
In another of its composition aspects, this invention provides a multibinding compound of formula I: (L)p(X), 1 wherein each L is independently a ligand which binds to a GABA receptor; each X is independently a linker; p is an integer of from 2 to 10; and ¢ is an integer of from 1 to 20; and pharmaceutically-acceptable salts thereof.
Preferably, g is less than p in the multibinding compounds of this invention. ;
Preferably, each ligand, L, in the multibinding compound of formula is independently selected from a compound of formula A-F.
) ZN 9 = c—z, VF )—C—NRR, / N J = N
N = Ne 4 JQ / Rs
C] NN 4
Rg ~N Rg ~N R¢ lo)
Ry Rz, z,
C1 : $g Cc
A B ;
CH N
Z-CHy_N, INT hg N I PA
N
“a =N = $ p— ~Z / Rs =N
Rg JW N o Rg =N Rg
Ry Ry: ns 9)
D
E F
-
where Z, ; may be an atom or group of atoms serving to connect the li gand,
L, to the linker, X; and wherein
R,, and R, may be, independently, H, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, or i cycloalkyl, preferably lower alkyl, more preferably, methyl or ethyl;
R, , may be, independently, H, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, preferably lower alkyl, more preferably methyl, or halo, preferably chloro;
Ry, Ry, Ry and R,. may be, independently, H, halo, substituted alkyl, aryl, preferably F, Cl or Br, or nitro;
In still another of its composition aspects, this invention provides a multibinding compound of formula II: ;
L'—X-L 11 wherein each L’ is independently a ligand which is an agonist, partial agonist, inverse agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors and X’ is a linker; and pharmaceutically-acceptable salts thereof.
Examples of compounds of this formula are shown below:
sz Q@zea azn + Q-uF cz QzE
BZD zB cz—Q—2D -z—Q—zc D2 Jz-= cz zc E-2-Q-zF. 3-zAQ-zD DZ QF p22 az Qzc BZ @P%E
B-z-Q—zE AZ Q-%D PZ %F oo
Fz zr Az %E cZAPzE
Also included in this invention are ligands, L, derived from 4~aminobutanoic acid and represented by the symbol, ZsG. - Three respresentative examples are given and are represented by the generic structures below. 2-6 zo Ez(Fzc 9
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
Preferably, in the multibinding compound of Formula II, each ligand, L’, is preferably independently selected from the group consisting of Formula A-F; and
X" is a linker; and pharmaceutically-acceptable salts thercof. )
Preferably, in the above embodiments, each linker (te, X, X or X” - independently has the formula: -X*ZA(Y*-Z),-Y -Z-X*- wherein m is an integer of from 0 to 20;
X* at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0- -S-, -NR-, -C(0)-, -C(0)O-, -C(O)NR-, -C(S), -C(S)O-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below;
Z is at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylcne, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond;
Y* and Y" at each separate occurrence are sclected from the group consisting of -C(O)NR’-, -NR’C(O)-, -NR’C(O)NR’-, -C(=NR’)-NR’-, -NR’-C(=NR’)-, -NR’-C(0)-O-, -N=C(X*)-NR-, -P(0)(OR’)-O-, -$(0),CR’R"-, -5(0),-NR’-, -S-S- and a covalent bond; where nis 0, 1 or 2; and
R,R" and R" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl,
substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted ) alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic. : In yet another of its composition aspects, this invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and an effective amount of a multibinding compound comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers wherein each of said li gands independently comprises an agonist, partial agonist, inverse agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors; and pharmaceutically-acceptable salts thereof,
This invention is also directed to pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and an effective amount of a multibinding compound derived from ligands of Formula A-F.
The multibinding compounds of this invention are effective agonists, partial agonists or antagonists of the GABA receptors, which are involved in a number of neurological disorders. Accordingly, in one of its method aspects, this invention provides a method for treating various neurological disorders mediated by GABA receptors in a patient, the method comprising administering to a patient having a neurological disorder a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier and a therapeutically-effective amount of a multibinding compound comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers wherein each of said ligands independently comprises an agonist, partial agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors; and pharmaceutically-acceptable salts thereof.
This invention is also directed to general synthetic methods for generating large libraries of diverse multimeric compounds which multimeric compounds are candidates for possessing multibinding properties with respect to the GABA receptors. The diverse multimeric compound libraries provided by this invention are synthesized by combining a linker or linkers with a li gand or ligands to provide for a library of multimeric compounds wherein the linker and li gand each have complementary functional groups permitting covalent linkage. The library of linkers is preferably selected to have diverse properties such as valency, linker ) length, linker geometry and rigidity, hydrophilicity or hydrophobicity, amphiphilicity, acidity, basicity and polarability and /or polarization. The library of ligands is preferably selected to have diverse attachment points on the same ligand, different functional groups at the same site of otherwise the same ligand, and the like.
This invention is also directed to gencral synthetic methods for generating large libraries of diverse multimeric compounds which multimeric compounds are candidates for possessing multibinding properties with respect to the GABA receptors. The diverse multimeric compound libraries provided by this invention are synthesized by combining a linker or linkers with a ligand or ligands to provide for a library of multimeric compounds wherein the linker and ligand each have complementary functional groups permitting covalent linkage. The library of linkers is preferably selected to have diverse properties such as valency, linker length, linker geometry and rigidity, hydrophilicity or hydrophobicity, amphiphilicity, acidity, basicity and polarability and /or polarization. The library of ligands is preferably selected to have diverse attachment points on the same ligand, different functional groups at the same site of otherwise the same ligand, and the like.
This invention is also directed to libraries of diverse multimeric compounds which multimeric compounds are candidates for possessing multibinding properties with respect to the GABA receptors. These libraries are prepared via the methods described above and permit the rapid and efficient evaluation of what molecular constraints impart multibinding properties to a ligand or a class of ligands targeting the GABA receptors.
Accordingly, in one of its method aspects, this invention is directed to a : method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties with respect to the GABA receptors which method comprises: . (a) identifying a ligand or a mixture of ligands which bind to the
GABA receptors wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality; (b) identifying a library of linkers wherein each linker in said library comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand; © preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands identificd in (a) with the library of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands; and (d) assaying the multimeric ligand compounds produced in (c) above to identify multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties.
In another of its method aspects, this invention is directed to a method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties which method comprises: (a) identifying a library of ligands which bind to GABA receptors wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality; (b) identifying a linker or mixture of linkers wherein each linker comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand; (c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the library of ligands identified in (a) with the linker or mixture of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands; and
(d) assaying the multimeric ligand compounds produced in (c) above to identify multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties.
The preparation of the multimeric ligand compound library is achieved by either the sequential or concurrent combination of the two or more stoichiometric equivalents of the ligands identified in (a) with the linkers identified in (db).
Sequential addition is preferred when a mixture of different ligands is employed to ensure heterodimeric or multimeric compounds are prepared. Concurrent addition of the ligands occurs when at least a portion of the multimer compounds prepared are homomultimeric compounds.
The assay protocols recited in (d) can be conducted on the multimeric ligand compound library produced in (c) save, or preferably, each member of the library is isolated by preparative liquid chromatography mass spectrometry (LCMS).
In one of its composition aspects, this invention is directed to a library of multimeric ligand compounds which may possess multivalent properties which library is prepared by the method comprising: (a) identifying a ligand or a mixture of ligands which bind to GABA receptors wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality; (b) identifying a library of linkers wherein each linker in said library comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand; and as (c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands identified in (a) with the library of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands.
In another of its composition aspects, this invention is directed to a library : of multimeric ligand compounds which bind to GABA receptors which may possess multivalent properties which library is prepared by the method comprising: . (a) identifying a library of ligands which bind to GABA receptors wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality; (b) identifying a linker or mixture of linkers wherein each linker comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand; and (©) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the library of ligands identified in (a) with the linker or mixture of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands.
In a preferred embodiment, the library of linkers employed in either the methods or the library aspects of this invention is selected from the group comprising flexible linkers, rigid linkers, hydrophobic linkers, hydrophilic linkers, linkers of different geometry, acidic linkers, basic linkers, linkers of different polarization, and/or polarability and amphiphilic linkers. For example, in one embodiment, each of the linkers in the linker library may comprise linkers of different chain length and/or having different complementary reactive groups.
Such linker lengths can preferably range from about 2 to 100A.
In another preferred embodiment, the ligand or mixture of ligands is selected to have reactive functionality at different sites on the ligands in order to provide for a range of orientations of said ligand on said multimeric ligand compounds. Such reactive functionality includes, by way of example, carboxylic acids, carboxylic acid halides, carboxy] esters, amincs, halides,pscudohalides, isocyanates, vinyl unsaturation, ketones, aldehydes, thiols, alcohols, boronates, anhydrides, and precursors thereof. It is understood, of course, that the reactive functionality on the ligand is selected to be complementary to at least one of the reactive groups on the linker so that a covalent linkage can be formed between the linker and the ligand.
In other embodiments, the multimeric ligand compound is homomeric (i.e., each of the ligands is the same, although it may be attached at different points) or heterodimeric (i.e., at least one of the ligands is different from the other ligands).
In addition to the combinatorial methods described herein, this invention provides for an iterative process for rationally cvaluating what molecular constraints impart multibinding properties to a class of multimeric compounds or ligands targeting the GABA receptors. Specifically, this method aspect is directed to a method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties with respect to the GABA receptors which method comprises: (2) preparing a first collection or iteration of multimeric compounds which is prepared by contacting at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands which target the GABA receptors with a linker or mixture of linkers wherein said ligand or mixture of ligands comprises at least one reactive functionality and said linker or mixture of linkers comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand wherein said contacting is conducted under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands; (b) assaying said first collection or iteration of multimeric compounds to assess which if any of said multimeric compounds possess multibinding properties; (c) repeating the process of (a) and (b) above until at least one multimeric compound is found to possess multibinding properties;
(d) evaluating what molecular constraints imparted multibinding properties to the multimeric compound or compounds found in the first iteration recited in (a)- (c) above; : (e) creating a second collection or iteration of multimeric compounds which elaborates upon the particular molecular constraints imparting multibinding properties to the multimeric compound or compounds found in said first iteration; (f) evaluating what molecular constraints imparted enhanced multibinding properties to the multimeric compound or compounds found in the second collection or iteration recited in (e) above; (2) optionally repeating steps (e) and (f) to further elaborate upon said molecular constraints.
Preferably, steps (e) and (f) are repeated at least two times, more preferably at from 2-50 times, even more preferably from 3 to 50 times, and still more preferably at least 5-50 times.
Figure 1 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising 2 ligands attached in different forms to a linker.
Figure 2 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising 3 ligands attached in different forms to a linker.
Figure 3 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising 4 ligands attached in different forms to a linker.
Figure 4 illustrates examples of multibinding compounds comprising 5-10 ligands attached in different forms to a linker.
This invention is directed to multibinding compounds which are agonists, ’ partial agonists, inverse agonists or antagonists of the GABA receptors, pharmaceutical compositions containing such compounds and methods for treating . or preventing various disorders, including anxiety, depression, panic disorders, sleep and seizure disorders, overdoses of benzodiazepine-type drugs, and emesis, producing sedation, hypnosis, retrograde amnesia and also for enhancing alertness and memory. When discussing such compounds, compositions or methods, the following terms have the following meanings unless otherwise indicated. Any undefined terms have their art recognized meanings.
The term "alkyl" refers to a monoradical branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon chain preferably having from i to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms ("lower alkyl”), and even more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, —butyl, iso-butyl, n-hexyl, n-decyl, tetradecyl, and the like.
The term "substituted alkyl" refers to an alkyl group as defined above, having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO,-alkyl, -SO,-substituted alkyl, -SO,-aryl and -SO,-heteroaryl.
The term "alkylene" refers to a diradical of a branched or unbranched saturated hydrocarbon chain, preferably having from 1 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. } This term is exemplified by groups such as methylene (-CH,-), ethylene (-CH,CH,-), the propylene isomers (e.g., -CH,CH,CH,- and -CH(CH,)CH,-) and ) the like.
The term "substituted alkylene" refers to an alkylene group, as defined above, having from | to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cvano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy. aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -
SO-heteroaryl, -SO,-alkyl, -SO,-substituted alkyl, -S0,-aryl and -SO,-heteroaryl.
Additionally, such substituted alkylene groups include those where 2 substituents on the alkylene group are fused to form one or more cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl groups fused to the alkylene group. Preferably such fused groups contain from | to 3 fused ring structures.
The term "alkaryl" refers to the groups -alkylene-aryl and -substituted alkylene-aryl where alkylene, substituted alkylene and aryl are defined herein.
Such alkaryl groups are exemplified by benzyl, phenethyl and the like.
The term "alkoxy" refers to the groups alkyl-O-, alkenyl-O-, cycloalkyi-O-, cycloalkenyl-O-, and alkynyl-O-, where alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, and alkynyl are as defined herein. Preferred alkoxy groups are alkyl-O- and include, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, iso-propoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexoxy, 1,2-dimethylbutoxy, and the like.
The term "substituted alkoxy" refers to the groups substituted alkyl-O-, substituted alkenyl-O-, substituted cycloalkyl-O-, substituted cycloalkenyl-O-, and substituted alkynyl-O- where substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl and substituted alkynyl are as defined herein. :
The term "alkylalkoxy" refers to the groups -alkylene-O-alkyl, : alkylene-O-substituted alkyl, substituted alkylene-O-alky! and substituted alkylene-O-substituted alkyl wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkylene and substituted alkylene are as defined herein. Preferred alkylalkoxy groups are alkylene-O-alkyl and include, by way of example, methylenemethoxy (-CH,0CH,), ethylenemethoxy (-CH,CH,0OCH,), n-propylene-iso-propoxy (-CH,CH,CH,0CH(CH,),), methylene-t-butoxy (-CH,-O-C (CH,),) and the like.
The term "alkylthioalkoxy" refers to the group -alkylene-S-alkyl, alkylene-S-substituted alkyl, substituted alkylene-S-alkyl and substituted alkylene-
S-substituted alkyl wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkylene and substituted alkylene are as defined herein. Preferred alkylthioalkoxy groups are alkylene-S- alkyl and include, by way of example, mcthylenethiomethoxy (-CH,SCH,), ethylenethiomethoxy (-CH,CH,SCH,), n-propylene-iso-thiopropoxy (-CH,CH,CH,SCH(CH,),). methylene-¢-thiobutoxy (-CH,SC(CH,),) and the like.
The term "alkenyl" refers to a monoradical of a branched or unbranched unsaturated hydrocarbon group preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-6 sites of vinyl unsaturation. Preferred alkenyl groups include ethenyl (-CH=CH,), n-propenyl (-CH,CH=CH,), iso-propeny! (-C(CH,)=CH,), and the like.
The term "substituted alkenyl" refers to an alkenyl! group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, ’ halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thicaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, : hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO,-alkyl, -SO,-substituted alkyl, -SO,-aryl and -SO,-heteroaryl.
The term "alkenylene" refers to a diradical of a branched or unbranched unsaturated hydrocarbon group preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-6 sites of vinyl unsaturation. This term is exemplified by groups such as ethenylene (-CH=CH-), the propenylene isomers (e.g., -CH,CH=CH- and -C(CH;)=CH-) and the like.
The term "substituted alkenylene"” refers to an alkenylene group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably from 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -
SO-heteroaryl, -SO,-alkyl, -SO,-substituted alkyl, -SO,-aryl and -SO,-heteroaryl.
Additionally, such substituted alkenylene groups include those where 2 substituents on the alkenylene group are fused to form one or more cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl groups fused to the alkenylene group.
The term "alkynyl" refers to a monoradical of an unsaturated hydrocarbon preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-6 sites of acetylene (triple bond) unsaturation. Preferred alkynyl : groups include ethynyl (-C=CH), propargyl (-CH,C=CH) and the like. . The term "substituted alkynyl" refers to an alkynyl group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO,-alkyl, -SO,-substituted alkyl, -SO,-aryl and -SO,-heteroaryl.
The term "alkynylenc" refers to a diradical of an unsaturated hydrocarbon preferably having from 2 to 40 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms and even more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-6 sites of acetylene (triple bond) unsaturation. Preferred alkynylene groups include ethynylene (-C=C-), propargylenc (-CH,C=C-) and the like.
The term "substituted alkynylene" refers to an alkynylene group as defined above having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy,
thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, ’ aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, - - SO-heteroaryl, -SO,-alkyl, -SO,-substituted alkyl, -SO,-aryl and -SO,-heteroaryl
The term "acyl" refers to the groups HC(O)-, alkyl-C(O)-, substituted alkyl-
C(O)-, cycloalkyl-C(O)-, substituted cycloalkyl-C(O)-, cycloalkenyl-C(O)-, substituted cycloalkenyl-C(O)-, aryl-C(O)-, heteroaryl-C(O)- and heterocyclic-
C(O)- where alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
The term “acylarino” or "aminocarbonyl” refers to the group -C(O)NRR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic or where both R groups are joined to form a heterocyclic group (e.g, morpholino) wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
The term "aminoacyl” refers to the group -NRC(O)R where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
The term "aminoacyloxy” or "alkoxycarbonylamino” refers to the group -NRC(O)OR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
The term "acyloxy" refers to the groups alkyl-C(O)O-, substituted alkyl-
C(O)O-, cycloalkyl-C(O)O-, substituted cycloalkyl-C(O)O-, aryl-C(0)O-,
heteroaryl-C(O)0-, and heterocyclic-C(O)O- wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
The term "aryl" refers to an unsaturated aromatic carbocyclic group of from 6 to 20 carbon atoms having a single ring (e.g., phenyl) or multiple condensed - (fused) rings (e.g., naphthyl or anthryl). Preferred aryls include phenyl, naphthyl and the like.
Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the aryl substituent, such aryl groups can optionally be substituted with from 1 to 5 substituents, preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyloxy, hydroxy, thiol, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, acylamino, alkaryl, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, -S0-alkyl, -SO- substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-hcteroaryl, -SO,-alkyl, -SO,-substituted alkyl, -
SO,-aryl, -SO,-heteroaryl and trihalomethyl. Preferred aryl substituents include alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, and thioalkoxy.
The term "aryloxy" refers to the group aryl-O- wherein the aryl group Is as defined above including optionally substituted ary! groups as also defined above.
The term “arylene” refers to the diradical derived from aryl (including substituted aryl) as defined above and is exemplified by 1,2-phenylene, 1,3- phenylene, 1,4-phenylene, 1,2-naphthylene and the like.
The term “amino” refers to the group -NH,.
The term “substituted amino refers to the group -NRR where each R is : independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, ; substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic provided that both R’s are not hydrogen.
The term “carboxyalkyl” or "alkoxycarbonyl" refers to the groups "-C(0)0-alkyl", “-C(0)O-substituted alkyl”, “-C(O)O-cycloalkyl”, “-C(0)O- substituted cycloalkyl”, “-C(0)O-alkeny!”, “-C(O)O-substituted alkenyl”, “-C(0)O-alkynyl" and “-C(O)O-substituted alkynyl” where alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl and substituted alkynyl alkynyl are as defined herein.
The term "cycloalkyl" refers to cyclic alkyl groups of from 3 to 20 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring or multiple condenscd rings. Such cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyi, cyclopentyl, cyclooctyl, and the like, or multiple ring structures such as adamantanyl, and the like.
The term "substituted cycloalkyl" refers to cycloalkyl! groups having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO,-alkyl, -SO,-substituted alkyl, -SO,-aryl and -SO,-heteroaryl.
The term "cycloalkenyl" refers to cyclic alkenyl groups of from 4 to 20 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring and at least one point of internal unsaturation. Examples of suitable cycloalkenyl groups include, for instance, cyclobut-2-enyl, cyclopent-3-enyl, cyclooct-3-enyl and the like. ;
The term "substituted cycloalkenyl" refers to cycloalkenyl groups having from 1 to 5 substituents, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO,-alkyl, -SO,-substituted alkyl, -SO,-aryl and -SO,-heteroaryl.
The term "halo" or "halogen" refers to fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo.
The term "heteroaryl" refers to an aromatic group of from 1 to 15 carbon atoms and 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected from oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur within at least one ring (if there is more than one ring).
Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the heteroaryl substituent, such heteroaryl groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5 substituents, preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyloxy, hydroxy, thiol, acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, substituted cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, acylamino, alkaryl, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy,
aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, . thiohetcroaryloxy, -SO-alkyl, -SO-substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-hetcroaryl, -
SO,-alkyl, -SO,-substituted alkyl, -SO,-aryl, -SO,-heteroaryl and trihalomethyl. ] Preferred aryl substituents include alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, and thioalkoxy. Such heteroaryl groups can have a single ring (e.g., pyridyl or furyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., indolizinyl or benzothienyl). Preferred heteroaryls include pyridyl, pyrrolyl and furyl.
The term “heteroaryloxy” refers to the group heteroaryl-O-.
The term “heteroarylene” refers to the diradical group derived from heteroaryl (including substituted heteroaryl), as defined above, and is exemplified by the groups 2,6-pyridylene, 2,4-pyridiylene, 1,2-quinolinylene, 1,8- quinolinylene, 1,4-benzofuranylene, 2,5-pyridnylene, 2,5-indolenyl and the like.
The term "heterocycle" or "heterocyclic" refers to a monoradical saturated unsaturated group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings, from 1 to 40 carbon atoms and from 1 to 10 hetero atoms, preferably 1 to 4 heteroatoms, selected from nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, and/or oxygen within the ring.
Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the heterocyclic substituent, such heterocyclic groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 5, and preferably 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, } heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, -SO-alkyl, -SO- substituted alkyl, -SO-aryl, -SO-heteroaryl, -SO,-alkyl, -SO,-substituted alkyl, -
SO,-aryl and -SO,-heteroaryl. Such heterocyclic groups can have a single ring or multiple condensed rings. Preferred heterocyclics include morpholino, piperidinyl, : and the like. 5 . Examples of nitrogen heterocycles and heteroaryls include, but are not limited to, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthylpyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, phenanthroline, isothiazole, phenazine, isoxazole, phenoxazine, phenothiazine, imidazolidine, imidazoline, piperidine, piperazine, indoline, morpholino, piperidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, and the like as well as N-alkoxy-nitrogen containing heterocycles.
The term “heterocyclooxy” refers to the group heterocyclic-O-.
The term “thioheterocyclooxy" refers to the group heterocyclic-S-.
The term “heterocyclene” refers to the diradical group formed from a heterocycle, as defined herein, and is exemplified by the groups 2,6-morpholino, 2,5-morpholino and the like.
The term “oxyacylamino” or "aminocarbonyloxy" refers to the group -OC(O)NRR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
The term “spiro-attached cycloalkyl! group” refers to a cycloalkyl group attached to another ring via one carbon atom common to both rings.
The term "thiol" refers to the group -SH.
The term "thioalkoxy" refers to the group -S-alkyl.
The term "substituted thioalkoxy" refers to the group -S-substituted alkyl.
The term "thioaryloxy" refers to the group aryl-S- wherein the aryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups also defined above.
The term "thioheteroaryloxy" refers to the group heteroaryl-S- wherein the heteroaryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined above.
As to any of the above groups which contain one or more substituents, it is understood, of course, that such groups do not contain any substitution or substitution patterns which are sterically impractical and/or synthetically non- feasible. In addition, the compounds of this invention include all stereochemical isomers arising from the substitution of these compounds, whether the isomers are those arising in the ligands, the linkers, or the multivalent constructs including the ligands and linkers.
The term "pharmaceutically-acceptable salt" refers to salts which retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the multibinding compounds of this invention and which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable. In many cases, the multibinding compounds of this invention are capable of forming acid and/or base salts by virtue of the presence of amino and/or carboxyl groups or groups similar thereto.
Pharmaceutically-acceptable base addition salts can be prepared from inorganic and organic bases. Salts derived from inorganic bases, include by way of example only, sodium, potassium, lithium, ammonium, calcium and magnesium salts. Salts derived from organic bases include, but are not limited to, salts of primary, secondary and tertiary amines, such as alkyl amines, dialkyl amines, trialkyl amines, substituted alkyl amines, di(substituted alkyl) amines, tri(substituted alkyl) amines, alkenyl amines, dialkenyl amincs, trialkenyl amines, substituted alkenyl amines, di(substituted alkenyl) amines, tri(substituted alkenyl) ) amines, cycloalkyl amines, di(cycloalkyl) amines, tri(cycloalkyl) amines, substituted cycloalkyl amines, disubstituted cycloalkyl amine, trisubstituted - cycloalkyl amines, cycloalkenyl amines, di(cycloalkenyl) amines, tri(cycloalkenyl) amines, substituted cycloalkenyl! amines, disubstituted cycloalkenyl amine, trisubstituted cycloalkenyl amines, aryl amines, diaryl amines, triaryl amines, heteroaryl amines, diheteroaryl amines, triheteroaryl amines, heterocyclic amines, diheterocyclic amines, triheterocyclic amines, mixed di- and tri-amines where at least two of the substituents on the amine are different and are selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and the like. Also included are amines where the two or three substituents, together with the amino nitrogen, form a heterocyclic or heteroaryl group.
Examples of suitable amines include, by way of example only, isopropylamine, trimethyl amine, diethyl amine, tri(iso-propyl) amine, tri(n- propyl) amine, ethanolamine, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, tromethamine, lysine, arginine, histidine, caffeine, procaine, hydrabamine, choline, betaine, ethylenediamine, glucosamine, N-alkylglucamines, theobromine, purines, piperazine, piperidine, morpholine, N-ethylpiperidine, and the like. It should also be understood that other carboxylic acid derivatives would be useful in the practice of this invention, for example, carboxylic acid amides, including carboxamides, lower alkyl carboxamides, dialkyl carboxamides, and the like.
Pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts may be prepared from inorganic and organic acids. Salts derived from inorganic acids include hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like. Salts derived from organic acids include acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, oxalic acid, malic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, ’ maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, p-toluene-sulfonic acid, salicylic acid, and the like.
The term “pharmaceutically-acceptable cation” refers to the cation of a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt.
The term "protecting group” or "blocking group" refers to any group which when bound to one or more hydroxyl, thiol, amino or carboxyl groups of the compounds (including intermediates thereof) prevents reactions from occurring at these groups and which protecting group can be removed by €onventional chemical or enzymatic steps to reestablish the hydroxyl, thiol, amino or carboxyl group. The particular removable blocking group employed is not critical and preferred removable hydroxyl blocking groups include conventional substituents such as allyl, benzyl, acetyl, chloroacetyl, thiobenzyl, benzylidine, phenacyl, t-butyl- diphenylsilyl and any other group that can be introduced chemically onto a hydroxyl functionality and later selectively removed either by chemical or enzymatic methods in mild conditions compatible with the nature of the product.
Preferred removable thiol blocking groups include disulfide groups, acyl groups, benzyl groups, and the like.
Preferred removable amino blocking groups include conventional substituents such as t-butyoxycarbony! (t-BOC), benzyloxycarbonyl (CBZ), fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl (FMOC), allyloxycarbonyl (ALOC), and the like which can be removed by conventional conditions compatible with the nature of the product.
Preferred carboxyl protecting groups include esters such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, t-butyl etc. which can be removed by mild conditions compatible with the nature of the product.
The term "optional" or "optionally" means that the subsequently described event, circumstance or substituent may or may not occur, and that the description includes instances where said event or circumstance occurs and instances where it does not.
The term "ligand" as used herein denotes a compound that is an agonist, partial agonist, inverse agonist, inverse partial agonist, or antagonist of the GABA receptors. The specific region or regions of the ligand that is (are) recognized by the receptor is designated as the “ligand domain”. A ligand may be either capable of binding to a receptor by itself, or may require the presence of one or more non- ligand components for binding (e.g., Ca™*, Mg or a water molecule is required for the binding of a ligand to various ligand binding sites).
Examples of ligands useful in this invention arc described herein. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that portions of the ligand structure that are not essential for specific molecular recognition and binding activity may be varied substantially, replaced or substituted with unrelated structures (for example, with ancillary groups as defined below) and, in some cases, omitted entirely without affecting the binding interaction. The primary requirement for a ligand is that it has a ligand domain as defined above. It is understood that the term ligand is not intended to be limited to compounds known to be useful in binding to GABA receptors (e.g., known drugs). Those skilled in the art will understand that the term ligand can equally apply to a molecule that is not normally associated with receptor binding properties. In addition, it should be noted that ligands that exhibit marginal activity or lack useful activity as monomers can be highly active as multivalent compounds because of the benefits conferred by multivalency.
The term "multibinding compound or agent" refers to a compound that is : capable of multivalency, as defined below, and which has 2-10 ligands covalently bound to one or more linkers which may be the same or different. Multibinding compounds provide a biological and/or therapeutic effect greater than the aggregate of unlinked ligands equivalent thereto which are made available for binding. That is to say that the biological and/or therapeutic effect of the ligands attached to the multibinding compound is greater than that achieved by the same amount of unlinked ligands made available for binding to the ligand binding sites (receptors). The phrase "increased biological or therapeutic effect” includes, for example: increased affinity, increased selectivity for target, increased specificity for target, increased potency, increased efficacy, decreased toxicity, improved duration of activity or action, decreased side effects, increased therapeutic index, improved bioavailability, improved pharmacokinetics, improved activity spectrum, and the like. The multibinding compounds of this invention will exhibit at least one and preferably more than one of the above-mentioned effects.
The term "potency" refers to the minimum concentration at which a ligand is able to achieve a desirable biological or therapeutic effect. The potency of a ligand is typically proportional to its affinity for its ligand binding sitc. In somc cases, the potency may be non-linearly correlated with its affinity. In comparing the potency of two drugs, e.g., a multibinding agent and the aggregate of its unlinked ligand, the dose-response curve of each is determined under identical test conditions (e.g., in an in vitro or in vivo assay, in an appropriate animal model).
The finding that the multibinding agent produces an equivalent biological or therapeutic effect at a lower concentration than the aggregate unlinked ligand is indicative of enhanced potency.
The term "univalency" as used herein refers to a single binding interaction between one ligand as defined herein with one ligand binding site as defined herein. It should be noted that a compound having multiple copies of a ligand (or ligands) exhibits univalency when only one ligand is interacting with a ligand binding site. Examples of univalent interactions are depicted below.
The term "multivalency” as used herein refers to the concurrent binding of from 2 to 10 linked ligands (which may be the same or different) and two or more corresponding receptors (ligand binding sites) on one or more receptors which may be the same or different.
For example, two ligands connected through a linker that bind concurrently to two ligand binding sites would be considered as bivalency; three ligands thus connected would be an example of trivalency. An example of trivalent binding, illustrating a multibinding compound bearing three ligands versus a monovalent binding interaction, is shown below: (< - = (4
BS —
Univalent Interaction
POY — 20
Trivalent Interaction
It should be understood that all compounds that contain multiple copies of a ligand attached to a linker or to linkers do not necessarily exhibit the phenomena of multivalency, i.e., that the biological and/or therapeutic effect of the multibinding agent is greater than the sum of the aggregate of unlinked ligands made available for binding to the ligand binding site (receptor). For multivalency to occur, the ligands that are connected by a linker or linkers have to be presented to their ligand binding sites by the linker(s) in a specific manner in order to bring about the desired ligand-orienting result, and thus produce a multibinding event.
The term "selectivity" or "specificity" is a measure of the binding preferences of a ligand for different ligand binding sites (receptors). The selectivity of a ligand with respect to its target ligand binding site relative to another ligand binding site is given by the ratio of the respective values of K, (i... the dissociation constants for each ligand-receptor complex) or, in cases where a biological effect is observed below the K, , the ratio of the respective EC's (i.e., the concentrations that produce 50% of the maximum response for the ligand interacting with the two distinct ligand binding sites (receptors)).
The term "ligand binding site" denotes the site on the GABA receptors that recognizes a ligand domain and provides a binding partner for the ligand. The ligand binding site may be defined by monomeric or multimeric structures. This interaction may be capable of producing a unique biological effect, for example, agonism, antagonism, modulatory effects, may maintain an ongoing biological event, and the like. )
The terms "agonism" and "antagonism" are well known in the art. Ligands which are full agonists are ligands which when bound trigger the maximum activity seen by the natural ligands. Ligands which are partial agonists are ligands which when bound trigger sub-maximum activity. Ligands which are antagonists are ligands that when bound, inhibit or prevent the activity arising from a natural ligand binding to the receptor. Antagonists may be of the surmountable class (results in the parallel displacement of the dose-response curve of the agonist to the right in a dose dependent fashion without reducing the maximal response for the agonist) or insurmountable class (results in depression of the maximal response for a given agonist with or without the parallel shift). Ligands which are inverse agonists are ligands that, when bound, decrease the basal activity of the unbound receptor or which provide an activity opposive of the natural agonist.
Ligands have measurable properties that relate to the interaction of the ligand and the receptor. These include the affinity of the ligand for the receptor, which relates to the energetics of the binding, the efficacy of the ligand for the receptor, which relates to the functional downstream activity of the ligand, the kinetics of the ligand for the receptor, which defines the onset of action and the duration of action, and the desensitization of the receptor for the ligand.
Selectivity defines the ratio of the affinity and/or efficacy of a ligand across two receptors. The term "modulatory effect” refers to the ability of the ligand to change the activity of an agonist or antagonist through binding to a ligand binding site. It is a combination of these properties which provides the foundation for defining the nature of the functional response.
It should be recognized that the ligand binding sites of the receptor that : participate in biological multivalent binding interactions are constrained to varying degrees by their intra- and inter-molecular associations (e.g., such macromolecular . structures may be covalently joined to a single structure, noncovalently associated in a multimeric structure, embedded in a membrane or polymeric matrix, and so on) and therefore have less translational and rotational freedom than if the same. structures were present as monomers in solution.
The term "inert organic solvent” means a solvent which is inert under the conditions of the reaction being described in conjunction therewith including, by way of example only, benzene, toluene, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dimethylformamide, chloroform, methylene chloride, diethyl ether, ethyl acetate, acetone, methylethyl ketone, methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, r-butanol, dioxane, pyridine, and the like. Unless specified to the contrary, the solvents used in the reactions described herein are inert solvents.
The term "treatment" refers to any treatment of a pathologic condition in a mammal, particularly a human, and includes: (1) preventing the pathologic condition from occurring in a subject which may be predisposed to the condition but has not yet been diagnosed with the condition and, accordingly, the treatment constitutes prophylactic treatment for the disease condition; (in) inhibiting the pathologic condition, i.e., arresting its development; (iii) relieving the pathologic condition, i.e., causing regression of the pathologic condition; or (iv) relieving the conditions mediated by the pathologic condition.
The term "pathologic condition which is modulated by treatment with a ligand" covers all disease states (i.e., pathologic conditions) which are generally acknowledged in the art to be usefully treated with a ligand for the GABA receptors in general, and those disease states which have been found to be usefully treated by a specific multibinding compound of our invention. Such disease states include, by way of example only, the prevention or treatment of anxiety, depression, sleep and seizure disorders, emesis, and overdoses of . benzodiazepine-type drugs, and enhancing alertness and the like. “Emesis”is the act or instance of vomiting. An “emetic agent” is an agent that induces vomiting. Emesis also includes nausea. In this invention, emetic agents include compounds used in chemotherapy and radiation therapy. “Chemotherapy induced emesis” refers to emetic episodes which are induced by exposure to chemotherapy and/or anti-cancer treatments such as treatment with, for example, cisplatin, adriamycin, apomorphine, cyclohexamide, cyclophosphamide, copper sulphate, ipecacuanha, mustine and radiation, among others. Chemotherapy induced emetic episodes may be acute or may bc delayed up to several days. There are generally three types of chemotherapy-induced emesis: acute, delayed and anticipatory (conditioned). Acute chemotherapy induced nausea and vomiting generally is considered to be that which occurs within the first 24 hours following drug administration. Delayed emesis is generally defined as emetic episodes starting about 24 hours or more following the last treatment. Conditioned or anticipatory emesis results from poor control of acute or delayed emesis. It is typically associated with anxiety prior to the next dose of chemotherapy, followed by nausea or vomiting before, during or possibly after the administration of chemotherapy.
The term "therapeutically effective amount” refers to that amount of multibinding compound which is sufficient to effect treatment, as defined above, when administered to a mammal in nced of such treatment. The therapeutically effective amount will vary depending upon the subject and disease condition being treated, the weight and age of the subject, the severity of the disease condition, the manner of administration and the like, which can readily be determined by one of ordinary skill in the art.
The term "linker", identified where appropriate by the symbol X, X’ or X", refers to a group or groups that covalently links from 2 to 10 ligands (as identified above) in a manner that provides for a compound capable of multivalency. Among other features, the linker is a ligand-orienting entity that permits attachment of multiple copies of a ligand (which may be the same or different) thereto. In some cases, the linker may itself be biologically active. The term “linker” does not, however, extend to cover solid inert supports such as beads, glass particles, fibers, and the like. But it is understood that the multibinding compounds of this invention can be attached to a solid support if desired. For example, such attachment to solid supports can be made for use in separation and purification processes and similar applications. .
The term “library” refers to at least 3, preferably from 10° to 10° and more preferably from 10 to 10° multimeric compounds. Preferably, these compounds are prepared as a multiplicity of compounds in a single solution or reaction mixture which permits facile synthesis thereof. In one embodiment, the library of multimeric compounds can be directly assayed for multibinding properties. In another embodiment, each member of the library of multimeric compounds is first isolated and, optionally, characterized. This member is then assayed for multibinding properties.
The term “collection” refers to a set of multimeric compounds which are prepared either sequentially or concurrently (e.g., combinatorially). The collection comprises at least 2 members; preferably from 2 to 10° members and still more preferably from 10 to 10* members.
The term “multimeric compound” refers to compounds comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently connected through at least one linker which compounds may or may not possess multibinding properties (as defined herein).
The term “pseudohalide” refers to functional groups which react in displacement reactions in a manner similar to a halogen. Such functional groups include, by way of example, mesyl, tosyl, azido and cyano groups.
Linkers
The extent to which multivalent binding is realized depends upon the efficiency with which the linker or linkers that joins the-ligands presents these ligands to the array of available ligand binding sites. Beyond presenting these ligands for multivalent interactions with li gand binding sites, the linker or linkers spatially constrains these interactions to occur within dimensions defined by the linker or linkers. Thus, the structural features of the linker (valency, geometry, orientation, size, flexibility, chemical composition, etc.) are features of multibinding agents that play an important role in determining their activities.
The linkers used in this invention are selected to allow multivalent binding of ligands to the ligand binding sites of GABA receptors, wherever such sites are located on the receptor structure.
The ligands are covalently attached to the linker or linkers using conventional chemical techniques providing for covalent linkage of the ligand to the linker or linkers. Reaction chemistries resulting in such linkages are well known in the art and involve the use of complementary functional groups on the linker and ligand. Preferably, the complementary functional groups on the linker are selected relative to the functional groups available on the ligand for bonding or which can be introduced onto the ligand for bonding. Again, such complementary functional groups are well known in the art. For example, reaction between a carboxylic acid of either the linker or the ligand and a primary or secondary amine of the ligand or the linker in the presence of suitable, well-known activating agents results in formation of an amide bond covalently linking the ligand to the linker; reaction between an amine group of either the linker or the ligand and a sulfonyl halide of the ligand or the linker results in formation of a sulfonamide bond covalently linking the ligand to the linker; and reaction between an alcohol or phenol group of either the linker or the ligand and an alkyl or aryl halide of the ligand or the linker results in formation of an ether bond covalently linking the ligand to the linker.
Table I below illustrates numerous complementary reactive groups and the resulting bonds formed by reaction there between.
Table I ;
R ive C Bindi . CL
First R ve G S IR ve C Linkage hydroxyl isocyanate urethane amine epoxide 3-hydroxyamine sulfonyl halide amine sulfonamide carboxyl amine amide hydroxyl alkyl/aryl halide ether aldehyde amine/NaCNBH, amine ketone amine/NaCNBH;, amine amine isocyanate carbamate
The linker is attached to the ligand at a position that retains ligand domain- ligand binding site interaction and specifically which permits the ligand domain of the ligand to orient itself to bind to the ligand binding site. Such positions and synthetic protocols for linkage are well known in the art. The term linker embraces everything that is not considered to be part of the ligand.
The relative orientation in which the ligand domains are displayed derives from the particular point or points of attachment of the ligands to the linker, and on the framework geometry. The determination of where acceptable substitutions can be made on a ligand is typically based on prior knowledge of structure-activity ) relationships (SAR) of the ligand and/or congeners and/or structural information about ligand-receptor complexes (e.g., X-ray crystallography, NMR, and the like).
Such positions and the synthetic methods for covalent attachment are well known in the art. Following attachment to the selected linker (or attachment to a significant portion of the linker, for example 2-10 atoms of the linker), the univalent linker-ligand conjugate may be tested for retention of activity in the relevant assay.
At present, it is preferred that the multibinding agent is a bivalent compound, e.g., two ligands which are covalently linked to linker X.
Methodology :
The linker, when covalently attached to multiple copies of the ligands, provides a biocompatible, substantially non-immunogenic multibinding compound. The biological activity of the multibinding compound is highly sensitive to the valency, geometry, composition, size, flexibility or ri gidity, etc. of the linker and, in turn, on the overall structure of the multibinding compound, as well as the presence or absence of anionic or cationic charge, the relative hydrophobicity/hydrophilicity of the linker, and the like on the linker.
Accordingly, the linker is preferably chosen to maximize the biological activity of the multibinding compound. The linker may be chosen to enhance the biological activity of the molecule. In general, the linker may be chosen from any organic molecule construct that orients two or more ligands to their ligand binding sites to permit multivalency. In this regard, the linker can be considered as a "framework" on which the ligands are arranged in order to bring about the desired ligand- orienting result, and thus produce a multibinding compound.
For example, different orientations can be achieved by including in the : framework groups containing mono- or polycyclic groups, including aryl and/or heteroaryl groups, or structures incorporating one or more carbon-carbon multiple ) bonds (alkenyl, alkenylene, alkyny! or alkynylene groups). Other groups can also include oligomers and polymers which are branched- or straight-chain species. In preferred embodiments, rigidity is imparted by the presence of cyclic groups (e.g., aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, etc.). In other preferred embodiments, the ring is a six or ten member ring. In still further preferred embodiments, the ring is an aromatic ring such as, for example, phenyl or naphthyl.
Different hydrophobic/hydrophilic characteristics of the linker as well as the presence or absence of charged moieties can readily be controlled by the skilled artisan. For example, the hydrophobic naturc of a linker derived from hexamethylene diamine (H,N(CH,),NH,) or related polyamines can be modified to be substantially more hydrophilic by replacing the alkylene group with a poly(oxyalkylene) group such as found in the commercially available "Jeffamines".
Examples of molecular structures in which the above bonding patterns could be employed as components of the linker are shown below.
Of we ~ J ~~ | gd ~ | g So” Ne HN Le 0 0 N™ °N OO” °'N 0
Cs .C Jo) _N_ a 0 0] 0) Cc” ¢c”
C
Wo. NN ~AN- Neve 0
NTN 0 ~~ A 0 0) : 0 I oO” °C
S 8 8 ~c Se Ss
A INP NerEN NA
S ) — NA NAENS
N S 3 N Cc é Cc 0 C S o Ss 0
S ~ Od -— NAINA [I]
NACE Cnc
Cc Cc N _S in oN oN
SNES ~oCo- j& 4 ~~ <7 Nw o) j ~NT ON N cre
C Cc TX
Sc Sho 8s SNTTho ~yPSN ; [<8 0 0 o ~n~ ON = : SNE / NAN Narr Na “1 -— ~nNN cyc Nyc ogc
The identification of an appropriate framework geometry and size for ligand domain presentation are important steps in the construction of a multibinding compound with enhanced activity. Systematic spatial searching strategies can be used to aid in the identification of preferred frameworks through an iterative process. :
Core structures other than those shown here can be used for determining the optimal framework display orientation of the ligands. The process may require the use of multiple copies of the same central core structure or combinations of different types of display cores.
The above-described process can be extended to trimers and compounds of higher valency. } Assays of each of the individual compounds of a collection generated as described above will lead to a subset of compounds with the desired enhanced activities (e.g., potency, selectivity, etc.). The analysis of this subset usinga technique such as Ensemble Molecular Dynamics will provide a framework orientation that favors the properties desired. A wide diversity of linkers is commercially available (see, €.g., Available Chemical Directory (ACD)). Many of the linkers that are suitable for use in this invention fall into this category. Other can be readily synthesized by methods well known in the art and/or are described below.
Having selected a preferred framework geometry, the physical properties of the linker can be optimized by varying the chemical compostion thereof. The composition of the linker can be varied in numerous ways to achieve the desired physical properties for the multibinding compound. For example, by adjusting the hydrophobicity or hydrophilicity of the linker, the ability of the compounds to cross the blood-brain barrier can be modified.
It can therefore be seen that there is a plethora of possibilities for the composition of a linker. Examples of linkers include aliphatic moieties, aromatic moieties, steroidal moieties, peptides, and the like. Specific examples are peptides or polyamides, hydrocarbons, aromatic groups, ethers, lipids, cationic or anionic groups, or a combination thereof.
Examples are given below, but it should be understood that various changes may be made and equivalents may be substituted without departing from the true spirit and scope of the invention. For example, properties of the linker can be modified by the addition or insertion of ancillary groups into or onto the linker, for example, to change the solubility of the multibinding compound (in water, fats, lipids, biological fluids, etc.), hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, linker flexibility, antigenicity, stability, and the like. For example, the introduction of one or more poly(ethylene glycol) (PEG) groups onto or into the linker enhances the : hydrophilicity and water solubility of the multibinding compound, increases both molecular weight and molecular size and, depending on the nature of the : unPEGylated linker, may increase the in vivo retention time. Further PEG may decrease antigenicity and potentially enhances the overall rigidity of the linker.
Ancillary groups which enhance the water solubility/hydrophilicity of the linker and, accordingly, the resulting multibinding compounds are useful in practicing this invention. Thus, it is within the scope of the present invention to use ancillary groups such as, for example, small repeating units of ethylene glycols, alcohols, polyols (e.g., glycerin, glycerol propoxylate, saccharides, including mono-, oligosaccharides, etc.), carboxylates (e.g., small repeating units of glutamic acid, acrylic acid, etc.), amines (c.g., tctracthylcnepentamine), and the like) to enhance the water solubility and/or hydrophilicity of the multibinding compounds of this invention. In preferred embodiments, the ancillary group used to improve water solubility/hydrophilicity will be a polyether .
The incorporation of lipophilic ancillary groups within the structure of the linker to enhance the lipophilicity and/or hydrophobicity of the multibinding compounds described herein is also within the scope of this invention. Lipophilic groups useful with the linkers of this invention include, by way of example only, aryl and heteroaryl groups which, as above, may be either unsubstituted or substituted with other groups, but are at least substituted with a group which allows their covalent attachment to the linker. Other lipophilic groups useful with the linkers of this invention include fatty acid derivatives which do not form bilayers in aqueous medium until higher concentrations are reached.
Also within the scope of this invention is the use of ancillary groups which result in the multibinding compound being incorporated or anchored into a vesicle or other membranous structure such as a liposome or a micelle. The term "lipid" ] refers to any fatty acid derivative that is capable of forming a bilayer or a micelle such that a hydrophobic portion of the lipid material orients toward the bilayer while a hydrophilic portion orients toward the aqueous phase. Hydrophilic : characteristics derive from the presence of phosphato, carboxylic, sulfato, amino, sulfhydryl, nitro and other like groups well known in the art. Hydrophobicity could be conferred by the inclusion of groups that include, but are not limited to, long chain saturated and unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon groups of up to 20 carbon atoms and such groups substituted by one or more aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, and/or heterocyclic group(s). Preferred lipids are phosphglycerides and sphingolipids, representative examples of which include phosphatidylcholine, phosphatidylethanolamine, phosphatidylserine, phosphatidylinositol, phosphatidic acid, palmitoyleoyl phosphatidylcholine, lysophosphatidylcholine, lysophosphatidyl-ethanolamine, dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine, dioleoylphosphatidylcholine, distearoyl-phosphatidylcholine or dilinoleoylphosphatidylcholine could be used. Other compounds lacking phosphorus, such as sphingolipid and glycosphingolipid families are also within the group designated as lipid. Additionally, the amphipathic lipids described above may be mixed with other lipids including triglycerides and sterols.
The flexibility of the linker can be manipulated by the inclusion of ancillary groups which are bulky and/or rigid. The presence of bulky or rigid groups can hinder free rotation about bonds in the linker or bonds between the linker and the ancillary group(s) or bonds between the linker and the functional groups. Rigid groups can include, for example, those groups whose conformational lability is restrained by the presence of rings and/or multiple bonds within the group, for example, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, and heterocyclic groups. Other groups which can impart rigidity include polypeptide groups such as oligo- or polyproline chains.
Rigidity may also be imparted by internal hydrogen bonding or by - hydrophobic collapse.
Bulky groups can include, for example, large atoms, ions (e.g., iodine, sulfur, metal ions, etc.) or groups containing large atoms, polycyclic groups, including aromatic groups, non-aromatic groups and structures incorporating one or more carbon-carbon multiple bonds (i.e., alkenes and alkynes). Bulky groups can also include oligomers and polymers which are branched- or straight-chain species. Species that are branched are expected to increase the rigidity of the structure more per unit molecular weight gain than are straight-chain species.
In preferred embodiments, rigidity is imparted by the presence of cyclic groups (e.g., aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, etc.). In other preferred embodiments, the linker comprises one or more six-membered rings. In still further preferred embodiments, the ring is an aryl group such as, for example, phenyl or naphthyl.
Rigidity can also be imparted electrostatically. Thus, if the ancillary groups are either positively or negatively charged, the similarly charged ancillary groups will force the presenter linker into a configuration affording the maximum distance between each of the like charges. The energetic cost of bringing the like-charged groups closer to each other will tend to hold the linker in a configuration that maintains the separation between the like-charged ancillary groups. Further ancillary groups bearing opposite charges will tend to be attracted to their oppositely charged counterparts and potentially may enter into both inter- and intramolecular ionic bonds. This non-covalent mechanism will tend to hold the linker into a conformation which allows bonding between the oppositely charged groups. The addition of ancillary groups which are charged, or alternatively, bear a latent charge when deprotected, following addition to the linker, including deprotection of a carboxyl, hydroxyl, thiol or amino group by a change in pH, ) oxidation, reduction or other mechanisms known to those skilled in the art which result in removal of the protecting group, is within the scope of this invention.
In view of the above, it is apparent that the appropriate selection of a linker group providing suitable orientation, restricted/unrestricted rotation, the desired degree of hydrophobicity/hydrophilicity, etc. is well within the skill of the art.
Eliminating or reducing antigenicity of the multibinding compounds described herein is also within the scope of this invention. In certain cases, the antigenicity of a multibinding compound may be eliminated or reduced by use of groups such as, for example, poly(ethylene glycol). ’
As explained above, the multibinding compounds described herein comprise 2-10 ligands attached to a linker that links the ligands in such a manner that they are presented to the receptor for multivalent interactions with ligand binding sites thereon/therein. The linker spatially constrains these interactions to occur within dimensions defined by the linker. This and other factors increases the biological activity of the multibinding compound as compared to the same number of ligands made available in monobinding form.
The compounds of this invention are preferably represented by the empirical formula (L)p(X), where L, X, p and q are as defined above. This is intended to include the several ways in which the ligands can be linked together in order to achieve the objective of multivalency, and a more detailed explanation is described below.
As noted previously, the linker may be considered as a framework to which ligands are attached. Thus, it should be recognized that the ligands can be attached at any suitable position on this framework, for example, at the termini of a linear chain or at any intermediate position.
The simplest and most preferred multibinding compound is a bivalent - compound which can be represented as L-X-L, where each L is independently a ligand which may be the same or different and each X is independently the linker.
Examples of such bivalent compounds are provided in Figure 1 where each shaded circle represents a ligand. A trivalent compound could also be represented in a linear fashion, i.c., as a sequence of repeated units L-X-L-X-L, in which L is a ligand and is the same or different at each occurrence, as can X. However, a trimer can also be a radial multibinding compound comprising three ligands attached to a central core, and thus represented as L):X, where the linker X could include, for example, an aryl or cycloalkyl group. Illustrations of trivalent and tetravalent compounds of this invention are found in Figures 2 and 3 respectively where, again, the shaded circles represent ligands. Tctravalent compounds can be represented in a linear array, e.g.,
L-X-L-X-L-X-L in a branched array, e.g.,
L-X-L-X-L i
L
(a branched construct analogous to the isomers of butane -- n-butyl, iso-butyl, sec- butyl, and s-butyl) or in a tetrahedral array, e.g., - NS 7 8
LY where X and L are as defined herein. Alternatively, it could be represented as an alkyl, aryl or cycloalkyl derivative as above with four (4) ligands attached to the . core linker. 5 .
The same considerations apply to higher multibinding compounds of this invention containing 5-10 ligands, as illustrated in Figure 4. However, for multibinding agents attached to a central linker such as aryl or cycloalkyl, there is a self-evident constraint that there must be sufficient attachment sites on the linker to accommodate the number of ligands present; for example, a benzenc ring could not directly accommodate more than 6 ligands, whereas a multi-ring linker (e.g., biphenyl) could accommodate a larger number of ligands.
Certain of the above described compounds may alternatively be represented as cyclic chains of the form: a
X X
_ and variants thereof.
All of the above variations are intended to be within the scope of the invention defined by the formula (L),(X),.
With the foregoing in mind, a preferred linker may be represented by the following formula: “X-ZA(Y-Z),-YP-Z-X-
in which: m 1s an integer of from 0 to 20;
X* at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -8-, -NR-, -C(0})-, -C(0)O-, -C(O)NR-, -C(8S), -C(S)O-, -C(S)NR- or a i covalent bond where R is as defined below;
Z is at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of . alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond;
Y® and Y® at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of:
Pit i I ~~
N ~~ J J ed
LY
R R' R' R'
ANY N KR
OR’
R' R' 0 xa
BI A Seen = ~~
NT oT SN NN -S(0),-NR'-
R' R' -S-S- or a covalent bond; in which: nis 0, 1 or 2; and
R, R’ and R” at each separate occurrence are selected from the group - consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, ’ alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, . substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
Additionally, the linker moiety can be optionally substituted at any atom therein by one or more alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic group.
In one embodiment of this invention, the linker (i.e., X, X or X") is selected from those shown in Table II: : Table II
R ve Lint
-HN-(CH,) ,-NH-C(0)-Z-C(0)-NH-(CH,) ,-NH- where Z is 1,2-phenyl : -HN-(CH,) ,-NH-C(0)-Z-C(0)-NH-(CH,) ,-NH- where Z is 1,3-phenyl . -HN-(CH,) ,-NH-C(0)-Z-C(0)-NH-(CH,) ,-NH- where Z is 1,4-phenyl -HN-(CH,) ,-NH-C(0)-Z-0-Z-C(0)-NH-(CH,) ,-NH- where Z is 1,4-phenyl | -HN«(CH,) ,,NH-C(0)-(CH,) 2~CH(NH-C(0)-(CH,);-CH,)-C(0)-NH-(CH,),-
NH- -HN-(CH,) ,NH-C(0)-(CH,)-O-(CH,)-C(0)-NH-(CH,),-NH- -HN-(CH,) »"NH-C(0)-Z-C(0)-NH-(CH,) ,-NH- where Z is 5-(n-octadecyloxy)-1,3-phenyl -HN-(CH,) ,-NH-C(0)-(CH,) ,-CH(NH-C(0)-Z)-C(0)-NH-(CH,) ,-NH- where Z is 4-biphenyl -HN-(CH,) ,-NH-C(0)-2-C(0)-NH-(CH,),-NH- where Z is 5-(n-butyloxy)-1,3-phenyl : -HN-(CH,) +NH-C(O)-(CH,)y-trans-(CH=CH)-C(0)-NH-(CH,) ,-NH- -HN-(CH,) ,-NH-C(0O)-(CH,) ;-CH(NH-C(0)-(CH,),,-CH,)-C(O)-NH-(CH,),-
NH- -HN-(CH,),-NH-C(0)-(CH,) ,-CH(NH-C(0)-Z)-C(0)-NH-(CH,) ,-NH- where Z is 4-(n-octyl)-phenyl -HN-(CH,)-Z-O-(CH,),-O-Z-(CH,)-NH- where Z is 1,4-phenyl -HN-(CH,),-NH-C(0)-(CH,),-NH-C(O)-(CH,);-C(0)-NH-(CH,),-C(0)-NH- (CH,),-NH- -HN-(CH,) ,-NH-C(0)-(CH,) ,-CH(NH-C(0)-Ph)-C(O)-NH-(CH,) ,-NH- -HN-(CH,) ,-NH-C(0)-(CH,)-N+((CH,),-CH,)(CH,-C(0)-NH-(CH,) ,-NH,)- (CH,)-C(O)-NH-(CH,) ,-NH- -HN-(CH,) ,-NH-C(O)-(CH,)-N((CH,),-CH,)-(CH,)-C(0)-NH-(CH,) ,-NH- -HN-(CH,) ,-NH-C(O)-(CH,) ,-NH-C(O)-(CH,) ,-NH-C(0)-(CH,) ,-C(0)-NH- (CH,) ,-C(O)-NH-(CH,) ,-C(O)-NH-(CH,),-NH- -HN-(CH,) ,-NH-C(0)-Z-C(0)-NH-(CH,) ,-NH- where Z is 5-hydroxy-1,3-phenyl
In another embodiment of this invention, the linker (i.e., X, X’ or X") has i the formula:
Rb RO — efro-tu-tit oe n . wherein each R* is independently selected from the group consisting of a covalent bond, alkylene, substituted alkylene and arylene; each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl and substituted alkyl; and n’ is an integer ranging from 1 to about 20.
In view of the above description of the linker, it is understood that the term “linker” when used in combination with the term “multibinding compound” includes both a covalently contiguous single linker (e.g., L-X-L) and multiple covalently non-contiguous linkers (L-X-L-X-L) within the multibinding compound.
Ligands
Any compound which is an agonist, partial agonist, inverse agonist, partial inverse agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors and which can be covalently linked to a linker as described herein can be used as a ligand in this invention. As discussed in further detail below, numerous such receptor agonists, partial agonists, inverse agonists, partial inverse agonists, and antagonists are known in the art and any of these known compounds or derivatives thereof may be employed as ligands in this invention.
GABA,
GABA, receptors are generally ligand-gated chloride ion channels. These : are heteropentameric complexes with subunits held together non-covalently, and a arranged pseudosymmetrically around a central core. A high level of structural a. diversity exists because of the presence in each receptor of at least three different subunits, each derived from one of five structurally distinct and genetically different families, a.(6), B (3), y(3), 6 (1) and € (1) genes. GABA affinity and efficacy (multiple levels of chloride ion conductance) is dependent on subunit composition.
A high affinity GABA binding site is localized at the interface of the « and f subunits. The receptors include allosteric modulatory binding sites for benzodiazepines, barbiturates, neurosteroids and ethanol. The binding of a benzodiazepine agonist increases the channel opening frequency. Barbituates and neurosteroids increase the GABA, channel open time.
Benzodiazepine-mediated amplification of GABA-gated current requires the presence of three different subunits. Subunits of class a, isoform 6 contain the benzodiazepine recognition site. Subunits of class f, isoform 4 contain the GABA recognition site. Subunits of the class vy, isoform 3 are essential for full expression of benzodiazepine activity. Subunits of the class §, isoform 1 are associated with high affinity for GABA, receptor agonists. When receptors include subunits of the class p, isoform 2, they are biculline-insensitive (GABAc)
Examples of full agonists include diazepam, midazolam, chlordiazepoxide, triazolam, lorazepam, alprazolam, and are associated with anxiolytic activity, sedation, ataxia, tolerance, dependence and memory impairment. Examples of partial agonists include abecarnil (Schering, Sandoz) and other B-carboline denviatives, bretazenil (Roche), clonazepam, FG8205 and other imidazobenzodiazepines, divaplon (RU32698) and other imidazo[1,2a]pyrimidines
Gardner, Drug. Dev. Res., 12, 1-28 (1988)), alpidemn and other imidazopyridines, ] pagoclone (Rhone-Poulenc) and imidazenil. They are generally known to possess anxiolytic activity with considerably less side effects than the full agonists.
Flumazenil is an example of an antagonist. FG7412 and RO15-4513 are examples of partial inverse agonists, and RO19-4603, B-CCM and DMCM are examples of full inverse agonists. They are associated with anxiogenesis, confusion, agitation, aggression and memory enhancement. Some compounds are even subtype- selective, for example, the full agonist zolpidem (Synthelabo). The precise pharmacology observed for each compound is dependent on its degree of efficacy and its affinity at each GABA, receptor subtype.
It has been postulated that there exists.a physiological balance between engodenous agonists and ‘inverse agonists. The balance can be disturbed by an increase in endogenous inverse agonism or a decrease in endogenous agonism, resulting in anxiety. Administration of agonists or partial agonists often restores the balance.
GABAb
GABADb receptors are G protein coupled 7TM receptors, and are negatively coupled to adenylate cyclase. Neuronal firing is inhibited via hyperpolarization (increased potassium ion conductance) or attenuation of neurotransmitter release (reduction in calcium ion influx). United States Patent No. 5,719,185 to Bountra, et al. discloses the use of GABA agonists having an agonist action at GABA, receptors in the treatment of emesis, for example, where the emesis is induced by cancer chemotherapeutic agents, radiation sickness, radiation therapy, poisons, toxins, pregnancy, vestibular disorders, post-operative sickness, gastrointestinal obstruction, reduced gastrointestinal motility, visceral pain, migraine, increased intercranial pressure, decreased intercranial pressure, or opioid analgesics. GABA, agonists are also known as being of use in the treatment of CNS disorders, such as muscle relaxation in spinal spasticity, cardiovascular disorders, asthma, gut motility disorders such as irritable bowel syndrome and as prokinetic and anti-tussive agents. )
Specific GABA agonists having an agonist action at GABA, receptors A include 4-amino-3-(5-chloro-2-thienyl)butyric acid and those compounds generically and specifically disclosed in GB 1017439, e.g. baclofen, U.S. Pat. No. 4,656,298, e.g. 3-aminopropylphosphonous acid (3-aminopropylphosphinic acid),
EP 0356128, i.e. 3-(aminopropyl)methyl phosphinic acid, and EP0463969, e.g. 3-(2-imidazolyl)-4-aminobutanoic acid which disclosures are incorporated herein by reference. A particularly preferred compound for use in the present invention is baclofen.
Baclofen, when used in the present invention, may be in the form of a mixture of isomers, for example a racemic mixture, or a separated isomer, i.e. the
S(+) isomer or R(-) isomer. Preferably the R(-) isomer of baclofen is used. 2-OH saclofen and phaclofen are examples of selective antagonists.
GABAc
GABACc receptors are also ligand-gated chloride ion channels, more sensitive to GABA and less prone to desensitization, and with slower onset and offset times and longer duration of chloride channel open time compared with
GABA, receptors. They are mainly expressed in the retina, cerebellum, hippocampus and cerebral cortex. They inhibit neuronal firing via hyperpolarization (chloride ion influx). They are bicuculline, phaclofen and benzodiazepine-insensitive. 1,2,5,6-tetrahydropyridin-4-yl)methylphosphinic acid is an example of a selective antagonist.
Typically, a compound selected for use as a ligand will have at least one functional group, such as an amino, hydroxyl, thiol or carboxyl group and the like, which allows the compound to be readily coupled to the linker. Compounds having such functionality are either known in the art or can be prepared by routine : modification of known compounds using conventional reagents and procedures.
The patents and publications set forth below provide numerous examples of i. suitably functionalized agonists, partial agonists, inverse agonists, partial inverse agonists and antagonists of the GABA receptors, and intermediates thereof, which may be used as ligands in this invention. :
A first group of preferred ligands for use in this invention are those ligands having formula A-F:
Z,., Ry, Ry, Ry and R,. are as defined herein.
Ligands of formula A-F (and the precursors thereof) are well-known in the art and can be readily prepared using art-recognized starting materials, reagents ) and reaction conditions. By way of illustration, the following patents and publications disclose compounds, intermediates and procedures useful in the preparation of ligands of formula A-F or related compounds suitable for use in this invention:
U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,455,943; 4,312,870; 4,435,403; 4,596,808; 4,623,649; 4,713,383; 4,719,210; 4,999,353; 5,010,079; 5,116,841; 5,710,304; 5,719,185; 5,744,602; 5,744,603; 5,776,959; and 5,792,766; PCT publications WO 91/07407, WO 92122552 and WO 9317025; EP 0 151 964, EP 0 181 282, EP 0 320 136, EP 0 344 943, EP 0 368 652, and
German Patent No. DE 3,246,932.
Costa, Neuropsychopharmacology, 4(4):225-235 (1991);
Haefely et al., TIPS, 11:452-456 (1990);
Huang et al., I. Med. Chem., 41(21):4130-4142 (1998);
Jacobsen et al., I. Med. Chem., 42(7):1123-1144 (1999);
Knoflach et al., L_Pharmacol. and Exp. Therapeutics, 266(1):385-391 (1993);
Liebigs Ann, Chem. 1986, 1749;
Liu etal, IL. Med. Chem., 39(9):1928-1934 (1996);
Massotti et al., I. Pharmacol. and Exp. Therapeutics, 256(3):1154-1160 (1991);
Mohler et al., Neurochemical Res., 20(5):631-636 (1995);
Nayeem et al., |. Neurochemistry, 62(2):815-818 (1994);
Schoch et al., Biochem. Soc. Symp., 59:121-134 (1993);
Sieghart, TIPS, 13:446-450 (1992),
Wafford et al., Am. Soc. Pharmacol. and Exp, Therapeutics, 43:240-244
Watjen et al., L Med. Chem., 32(10):2282-2291 (1989)
Each of these patents and publications is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety to the same extent as if each individual patent or publication was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference in its entirety.
Preparation of Multibinding Compounds
The multibinding compounds of this invention can be prepared from readily available starting materials using the following general methods and procedures. It will be appreciated that where typical or preferred process conditions (i.e., reaction temperatures, times, mole ratios of reactants, solvents, pressures, etc.) are given, other process conditions can also be used unless otherwise stated. Optimum reaction conditions may vary with the particular reactants or solvent used, but such conditions can be determined by one skilled in the art by routine optimization procedures.
Additionally, as will be apparent to those skilled in the art, conventional protecting groups may be necessary to prevent certain functional groups from undergoing undesired reactions. The choice of a suitable protecting group for a particular functional group as well as suitable conditions for protection and deprotection are well known in the art. For example, numerous protecting groups, and their introduction and removal, are described in T. W. Greene and G. M. Wuts,
Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, Second Edition, Wiley, New York, 1991, and references cited therein.
The ligands can be covalently attached to the linker through any available position on the ligands, provided that when the ligands is attached to the linker (at least one of the linkers), the ligands retains its ability to bind to the GABA receptors, specifically at the benzadiazepine binding sites. The term linker refers to everything that is not considered tc be part of the ligand.
Covalent linkage with the linkers can contribute to reducing the dose of the ligand required to induce the desired therapeutic effect. This may result from, for example, increased ability for the GABA receptors, in affinity may be caused, for example, by changing the ligand efficacy of the GABA receptors (from a partial to a full agonist) and/or by altering the reversibility of binding. By altering the reversibility of binding, the multivalent compounds described herein may result in a longer duration of action.
Certain sites of attachment of the linker to the ligand are preferred based on known structure-activity relationships (EP 0 573 982 Al by Walser et al., Gilman etal, I Org. Chem., 58:3285-98 (1993); George et al., Il Farmaco 46(Suppl 1):277-288 (1991); Trapani et al., I. Med. Chem,, 40:3109-3118 (1997); Hester and
Von Voigtlander, IL. Med. Chem., 22: 1390-98 (1979); Hester et al., I. Med. Chem., 23:392-402 (1980); Hester et al., I. Med. Chem., 23:873-77 (1980); and Hester et al., L Med. Chem., 23:643-47 (1980), the contents of each of which are hereby incorporated by reference. Preferably, the linker is attached to a site on the ligand where structure-activity studies show that a wide variety of substituents are tolerated without loss of receptor activity. For example, many known GABA receptor agonists, partial agonists, inverse agonists, partial inverse agonists and antagonists contain, among other structural features, a benzodiazepine group.
Structure-activity studies show that only very minor modifications are tolerated on the benzodiazepine ring system, but that side chains can be present without adversely affecting the binding affinity for the GABA rcccptors.
It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the following methods may be used to prepare other muitibinding compounds of this invention. Ligand precursors, for example, ligands containing a leaving group or a nucleophilic . group, can be covalently linked to a linker precursor containing a nucleophilic group or a leaving group, using conventional reagents and conditions. For - example, two equivalents of ligand precursor with a halide, tosylate, or other leaving group, can be readily coupled to a linker precursor containing two nucleophilic groups, for example, amine groups, to form a dimer. The leaving - group employed in this reaction may be any conventional leaving group including, by way of example, a halogen such as chloro, bromo or iodo, or a sulfonate group such as tosyl, mesy! and the like. When the nucleophilic group is a phenol, any base which effectively deprotonates the phenolic hydroxyl group may be used, including, by way of illustration, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium hydride, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium ethoxide, triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine and the like. Nucleophilic substitution reactions are typically conducted in an inert diluent, such as tetrahydrofuran, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, acetone, 2- butanone, 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone and the like. After the reaction is complete, the dimer is typically isolated using conventional procedures, such as extraction, filtration, chromatography and the like.
By way of further illustration, dimers with a hydrophilic linker can be formed using a ligand precursor containing nucleophilic groups and a polyoxyethylene containing leaving groups, for example, poly(oxyethylene) dibromide (where the number of oxyethylene units is typically an integer from 1 to about 20). In this reaction, two molar equivalents of the ligand precursor are reacted with one molar equivalent of the poly(oxyethylene) dibromide in the presence of excess potassium carbonate to afford a dimer. This reaction is typically conducted in N,N-dimethylformamide at a temperature ranging from about 25°C to about 100°C for about 6 to about 48 hours.
Alternatively, the linker connecting the ligands may be prepared in several steps. Specifically, a ligand precursor can first be coupled to an “adapter”, i.e., a bifunctional group having a leaving group at one end and another functional group at the other end which allows the adapter to be coupled to a intermediate linker i group. In some cases, the functional group used to couple to the intermediate linker is temporarily masked with a protecting group (“PG”). Representative examples of adapters include, by way of illustration, tert-butyl bromoacetate, 1-
Fmoc-2-bromoethylamine, 1-trity]-2-bromoethanethiol, 4-iodobenzyl bromide, propargyl bromide and the like. After the ligand precursor is coupled to the adapter and the protecting group is removed from the adapter’s functional group (if a protecting group is present) to form an intermediate, two molar equivalents of the intermediate are then coupled with an intermediate linker to form a dimer.
Ligand precursors can be coupled with adapters which include both leaving groups and protecting groups to form protected intermediates. The leaving group employed in this reaction may bc any conventional leaving group including, by way of example, a halogen such as chloro, bromo or iodo, or a sulfonate group such as tosyl, mesyl and the like. Similarly, any conventional protecting group may be employed including, by way of example, esters such as the methyl, res- butyl, benzyl (“Bn”) and 9-fluorenylmethyl (“Fm”) esters.
Protected intermediates can then be deprotected using conventional procedures and reagents to afford deprotected intermediates. For example, tert- butyl esters are readily hydrolyzed with 95% trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane; methyl esters can be hydrolyzed with lithium hydroxide in tetrahydrofuran/water; benzyl esters can be removed by hydrogenolysis in the presence of a catalyst, such as palladium on carbon; and 9-fluorenylmethy! esters are readily cleaved using 20% piperidine in DMF. If desired, other well-known protecting groups and deprotecting procedures may be employed in these reactions to form deprotected intermediates.
Similarly, ligand precursor having an adapter with an amine functional group can be prepared. Ligand precursors can be coupled with adapters which include leaving groups and protected amine groups to afford protected ’ intermediates. The leaving group employed in this reaction may be any conventional leaving group. Similarly, any conventional amine protecting group may be employed including, by way of example, trityl, tert-butoxycarbonyl (“Boc”), benzyloxycarbony! (“CBZ”) and 9-fluorenylmethoxy-carbony! (“Fmoc").
After coupling the adapter to the ligand precursor, the resulting protected intermediate is deprotected to afford a ligand precursor including an amine group using conventional procedures and reagents. For example, a trityl group is readily removed using hydrogen chloride in acetone; a Boc group is removed using 95% trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane; a CBZ group can be removed by hydrogenolysis in the presence of a catalyst, such as palladium on carbon; and a 9- fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl group is readily cleaved using 20% piperidine in DMF to afford the deblocked amine. Other well-known amine protecting groups and deprotecting procedures may be employed in these reactions to form amine- containing intermediates and related compounds.
Ligand precursors having an adapter, for example, one including a free carboxylic acid group or a free amine group, can be readily coupled to intermediate linkers having complementary functional groups to form multibinding compounds as described herein. For example, when one component includes a carboxylic acid group, and the other includes an amine group, the coupling reaction typically employs a conventional peptide coupling reagent and is conducted under conventional coupling reaction conditions, typically in the presence of a trialkylamine, such as ethyldiisopropylamine. Suitable coupling reagents for use in this reaction include, by way of example, carbodiimides, such as ethyl-3-(3- dimethylamino)propylcarbodiimide (EDC), dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC), diisopropylcarbodiimide (DIC) and the like, and other well-known coupling reagents, such as N,N’-carbonyldiimidazole, 2-ethoxy-1-ethoxycarbonyl-1,2-
dihydroquinoline (EEDQ), benzotriazol-1-yloxy-tris(dimethylamino)phosphonium . hexafluorophosphate (BOP), O-(7-azabenzotrniazol-1-yl)-N, N,N’ N"- tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (HATU) and the like. Optionally, well- known coupling promoters, such N-hydroxysuccinimide, 1-hydroxybenzotriazolc (HOBT), 1-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole (HOAT), N,N-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP) and the like, may be employed in this reaction. Typically, this coupling reaction is conducted at a temperature ranging from about 0°C to about 60°C for about | to about 72 hours in an inert diluent, such as THF, to afford the dimer.
The multibinding compounds described herein can also be prepared using a wide variety of other synthetic reactions and reagents. For example, ligand precursors having aryliodide, carboxylic acid,-amine and boronic acid functional groups can be prepared. Hydroxymethyl pyrrole can be readily coupled under
Mitsunobu reaction conditions to various phenols to provide, after deprotection, functionalized intermediates. The Mitsunobu reaction is typically conducted by reacting hydroxymethyl pyrrole and the appropriate phenol using diethyl azodicarboxylate (DEAD) and triphenylphosphine at ambient temperature for about 48 hours. Deprotection, if necessary, using conventional procedures and reagents then affords the functionalized intermediates.
The functionalized intermediates can be employed in the synthesis of multibinding compounds. For example, aryliodide intermediates can be coupled with bis-boronic acid linkers to provide dimers. Typically, this reaction is conducted by contacting two molar equivalents of the aryliodide and one molar equivalent of the bis-boronic acid in the presence of tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0), sodium carbonate and water in refluxing toluene.
Aryliodide intermediates can also be coupled with acrylate intermediates or alkyne intermediate to afford dimers. These reactions are typically conducted by contacting two molar equivalents of aryliodide intermediates with one molar equivalent of either acrylates or alkynes in the presence of dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II), copper (I) iodide and } diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide to afford the respective dimers.
As will be readily apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art, the synthetic procedures described herein or those known in the art may be readily modified to afford a wide variety of compounds within the scope of this invention.
Combi (al Librari
The methods described herein lend themselves to combinatorial approaches for identifying multimeric compounds which possess multibinding properties.
Specifically, factors such as the proper juxtaposition of the individual ligands of a multibinding compound with respect to the relevant array of binding sites on a target or targets is important in optimizing the interaction of the multibinding compound with its target(s) and to maximize the biological advantage through multivalency. One approach is to identify a library of candidate multibinding compounds with properties spanning the multibinding parameters that are relevant for a particular target. These parameters include: (1) the identity of ligand(s), (2) the orientation of ligands, (3) the valency of the construct, (4) linker length, (5) linker geometry, (6) linker physical properties, and (7) linker chemical functional groups.
Libraries of multimeric compounds potentially possessing multibinding properties (i.e., candidate multibinding compounds) and comprising a multiplicity of such variables are prepared and these libraries are then evaluated via conventional assays corresponding to the ligand selected and the multibinding parameters desired. Considerations relevant to each of these variables are set forth below:
Selection of Iigand(s)
A single ligand or set of ligands is (are) selected for incorporation into the libraries of candidate multibinding compounds which library is directed against a particular biological target or targets, i.e., binding to GABA receptors. The only requirement for the ligands chosen is that they are capable of interacting with the selected target(s). Thus, ligands may be known drugs, modified forms of known drugs, substructures of known drugs or substrates of modified forms of known drugs (which are competent to interact with the target), or other compounds.
Ligands are preferably chosen based on known favorable propertics that may be projected to be carried over to or amplified in multibinding forms. Favorable properties include demonstrated safety and efficacy in humanypatients, appropriate
PK/ADME profiles, synthetic accessibility, and desirable physical properties such as solubility, logP, etc. However, it is crucial to note that ligands which display an unfavorable property from among the previous list may obtain a more favorable property through the process of multibinding compound formation; i.e., ligands should not necessarily be excluded on such a basis. For example, a ligand that is not sufficiently potent at a particular target so as to be efficacious in a human patient may become highly potent and efficacious when presented in multibinding form. A ligand that is potent and efficacious but not of utility because of a non- mechanism-related toxic side effect may have increased therapeutic index (increased potency relative to toxicity) as a multibinding compound. Compounds that exhibit short in vivo half-lives may have extended half-lives as multibinding compounds. Physical properties of ligands that limit their usefulness (e.g. poor bioavailability due to low solubility, hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity) may be rationally modulated in multibinding forms, providing compounds with physical properties consistent with the desired utility.
or ion: Select; Li | . { Linkine Chemi
Several points are chosen on each ligand at which to attach the ligand to the linker. The selected points on the ligand/linker for attachment are functionalized to ’ contain complementary reactive functional groups. This permits probing the effects of presenting the ligands to their target binding site(s) in multiple relative orientations, an important multibinding design parameter. The only requirement for choosing attachment points is that attaching to at least one of these points does not abrogate activity of the ligand. Such points for attachment can be identified by structural information when available. For example, inspection of a co-crystal structure of a ligand bound to its target allows one to identify one or more sites where linker attachment will not preclude the ligand/target interaction.
Alternatively, evaluation of ligand/target binding by nuclear magnetic resonance will permit the identification of sites non-essential for ligand/target binding. See, for example, Fesik, et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,891,643, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. When such structural information is not available, utilization of structure-activity relationships (SAR) for ligands will suggest positions where substantial structural variations are and are not allowed.
In the absence of both structural and SAR information, a library is merely selected with multiple points of attachment to allow presentation of the ligand in multiple distinct orientations. Subsequent evaluation of this library will indicate what positions are suitable for attachment.
It is important to emphasize that positions of attachment that do abrogate the activity of the monomeric ligand may also be advantageously included in candidate multibinding compounds in the library provided that such compounds bear at least one ligand attached in a manner which does not abrogate intrinsic activity. This selection derives from, for example, heterobivalent interactions within the context of a single target molecule. For example, consider a ligand bound to its target, and then consider modifying this ligand by attaching to it a second copy of the same ligand with a linker which allows the second ligand to interact with the same target at sites proximal to the first binding site, which } include elements of the target that are not part of the formal ligand binding site and/or elements of the matrix surrounding the formal binding site, such as the membrane. Here, the most favorable orientation for interaction of the second ligand molecule may be achieved by attaching it to the linker at a position which abrogates activity of the ligand at the first binding site. Another way to consider this is that the SAR of individual ligands within the context of a multibinding structure is often different from the SAR of those same li gands in momomeric form.
The foregoing discussion focused on bivalent interactions of dimeric compounds bearing two copies of the same ligand joined to a single linker through different attachment points, one of which may abrogate the binding/activity of the monomeric ligand. It should also be understood that bivalent advantage may also be attained with heterodimeric constructs bearing two different ligands that bind to common or different targets.
Once the ligand attachment points have been chosen, one identifies the types of chemical linkages that are possible at those points. The most preferred types of chemical linkages are those that are compatible with thc overall structure of the ligand (or protected forms of the ligand) readily and generally formed, stable and intrinsically innocuous under typical chemical and physiological conditions, and compatible with a large number of available linkers. Amide bonds, ethers, amines, carbamates, ureas, and sulfonamides are but a few examples of preferred linkages.
Linker Selection
In the library of linkers employed to generate the library of candidate multibinding compounds, the selection of linkers employed in this library of linkers takes into consideration the following factors:
Yalency: In most instances the library of linkers is initiated with divalent linkers. The choice of ligands and proper juxtaposition of two ligands relative to their binding sites permits such molecules to exhibit target binding affinities and ’ specificities more than sufficient to confer biological advantage. Furthermore, divalent linkers or constructs are also typically of modest size such that they retain the desirable biodistribution properties of small molecules.
Linker Length: Linkers are chosen in a range of lengths to allow the spanning of a range of inter-ligand distances that encompas the distance preferable for a given divalent interaction. In some instances the preferred distance can be estimated rather precisely from high-resolution structural information of targets. In other instances where high-resolution structural information is not available, one can make use of simple models to estimate the maximum distance between binding sites either on adjacent receptors or at different locations on the same receptor. In situations wherc two binding sites arc present on thc samc target (or target subunit for multisubunit targets), preferred linker distances are 2-20 A, with more preferred linker distances of 3-12 A. In situations where two binding sites reside on separate target sites, preferred linker distances are 20-100 A, with more preferred distances of 30-70 A.
Linker Geometry and Rigidity: The combination of ligand attachment site, linker length, linker geometry, and linker ngidity determine the possible ways in which the ligands of candidate multibinding compounds may be displayed in three dimensions and thereby presented to their binding sites. Linker geometry and rigidity are nominally determined by chemical composition and bonding pattern, which may be controlled and are systematically varied as another spanning function in a multibinding array. For example, linker geometry is varied by attaching two ligands to the ortho, meta, and para positions of a benzene ring, or in cis- Or trans-arrangements at the 1,1- vs. 1,2- vs. 1,3- vs. 1,4- positions around a cyclohexane core or in cis- or trans-arrangements at a point of ethylene unsaturation. Linker rigidity is varied by controlling the number and relative energies of different conformational states possible for the linker. For example, a divalent compound bearing two ligands joined by 1,8-octy! linker has many more degrees of freedom, and is therefore less rigid than a compound in which the two )
S ligands are attached to the 4,4' positions of a biphenyl linker.
Linker Physical Properties: The physical properties of linkers are nominally determined by the chemical constitution and bonding patterns of the linker, and linker physical properties impact the overall physical properties of the candidate multibinding compounds in which they are included. A range of linker compositions is typically selected to provide a range of physical properties (hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, amphiphilicity, polarization, acidity, and basicity) in the candidate multibinding compounds. The particular choice of linker physical properties is made within the context of the physical properties of the ligands they join and preferably the goal is to generate molecules with favorable PK/ADME properties. For example, linkers can be selected to avoid those that are too hydrophilic or too hydrophobic to be readily absorbed and/or distributed in vivo.
Linker Chemical Functional Groups: Linker chemical functional groups are selected to be compatible with the chemistry chosen to connect linkers to the ligands and to impart the range of physical properties sufficient to span initial examination of this parameter. . La] S .
Having chosen a set of n ligands (n being determined by the sum of the number of different attachment points for each ligand chosen) and m linkers by the process outlined above, a library of (n!)m candidate divalent multibinding compounds is prepared which spans the relevant multibinding design parameters for a particular target. For example, an array generated from two ligands, one which has two attachment points (Al, A2) and one which has three attachment points (B1, B2, B3) joined in all possible combinations provide for at least 15 possible combinations of multibinding compounds: : Al-Al Al-A2 Al-B1 Al1-B2 Al-B3 A2-A2 A2-Bl A2-B2
S A2-B3 B1-B1 Bi-B2 B1-B3 B2-B2 B2-B3 B3-B3
When each of these combinations is joined by 10 different linkers, a library of 150 candidate multibinding compounds results.
Given the combinatorial nature of the library, common chemistries are preferably used to join the reactive functionalies on the ligands with complementary reactive functionalities on the linkers. The library therefore lends itself to efficient parallel Synthetic methods. The combinatorial library can employ solid phase chemistries well known in the art wherein the ligand and/or linker is attached to a solid support. Alternatively and preferably, the combinatorial libary is prepared in the solution phase. After synthesis, candidate multibinding compounds are optionally purified before assaying for activity by, for example, chromatographic methods (e.g., HPLC).
Analysis of the Library
Various methods are used to characterize the properties and activities of the candidate multibinding compounds in the library to determine which compounds possess multibinding properties. Physical constants such as solubility under various solvent conditions and logD/clogD values can be determined. A combination of NMR spectroscopy and computational methods is used to determine low-energy conformations of the candidate multibinding compounds in fluid media. The ability of the members of the library to bind to the desired target and other targets is determined by various standard methods, which include radioligand displacement assays for receptor and ion channel targets, and kinetic inhibition analysis for many enzyme targets. /n vitro efficacy, such as for receptor agonists and antagonists, ion channel blockers, and antimicrobial activity, can also be determined. Pharmacological data, including oral absorption, everted gut penetration, other pharmacokinetic parameters and efficacy data can be determined in appropriate models. In this way, key structure-activity relationships are ) obtained for multibinding design parameters which are then used to direct future work. :
The members of the library which exhibit multibinding properties, as defined herein, can be readily determined by conventional methods. First those members which exhibit multibinding properties are identified by conventional methods as described above including conventional assays (both in vitro and in vivo). -
Second, ascertaining the structure of those compounds; which exhibit multibinding properties can be accomplished via art recognized procedures. For example, each member of the library can be encrypted or tagged with appropriate information allowing determination of the structure of relevant members at a later time. See, for example, Dower, et al., International Patent Application Publication
No. WO 93/06121; Brenner, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., USA, 89:5181 (1992),
Gallop, et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,846,839; each of which are incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Alternatively, the structure of relevant multivalent compounds can also be determined from soluble and untagged libaries of candidate multivalent compounds by methods known in the art such as those described by
Hindsgaul, et al., Canadian Patent Application No. 2,240,325 which was published on July 11, 1998. Such methods couple frontal affinity chromatography with mass spectroscopy to determine both the structure and relative binding affinities of candidate multibinding compounds to receptors.
The process set forth above for dimeric candidate multibinding compounds ) can, of course, be extended to trimeric candidate compounds and higher analogs thereof.
Based on the information obtained through analysis of the initial library, an optional component of the process is to ascertain one or more promising multibinding "lead" compounds as defined by particular relative ligand orientations, linker lengths, linker geometries, etc. Additional libraries can then be generated around these leads to provide for further information regarding structure to activity relationships. These arrays typically bear more focuscd variations in linker structure in an effort to further optimize target affinity and/or activity at the target (antagonism, partial agonism, etc.), and/or alter physical properties. By iterative redesign/analysis using the novel principles of multibinding design along with classical medicinal chemistry, biochemistry, and pharmacology approaches, one is able to prepare and identify optimal multibinding compounds that exhibit biological advantages towards their targets and as therapeutic agents.
To further elaborate upon this procedure, suitable divalent linkers include, by way of example only, those derived from dicarboxylic acids, disulfonylhalides, dialdehydes, diketones, dihalides, diisocyanates, diamines, diols, mixtures of carboxylic acids, sulfonylhalides, aldehydes, kctones, halides, isocyanates, amines and diols. In each case, the carboxylic acid, sulfonylhalide, aldehyde, ketone, halide, isocyanate, amine and diol functional group is reacted with a complementary functionality on the ligand to form a covalent linkage. Such complementary functionality is well known in the art as illustrated in the following table:
R ve C ! Rindine Chemistr
First R ve G S active G Lint hydroxy! isocyanate urethane . amine epoxide f-hydroxyamine sulfonyl halide amine sulfonamide carboxyl acid amine amide hydroxyl alkyl/aryl halide ether aldehyde amine(+ reducing agent) amine ketone amine(+ reducing agent) amine amine isocyanate carbamate
Exemplary linkers include the following linkers identified as X-1 through
X-418 as set forth below: 15 .
Diacids 0 OH
ANAS
. HO ON er
OH
X-1 HO” “0 X-2
Ra Se n0 fou . 0 0 OH
OH H3C HO 0
X-3 CH
X-4 J 0 OH CH 3 X-5
HPN No 0 OH 0 AoA OH x HO 0 0 -6 X—7 HO Ao 0 X-8 0 OH ) HO
OH N OH OH 0 5 0 OH
Nat 070 ho?
HO CH
HO 0 HO CH '3 - J X—12
X-9 X-10 X-11 0 OH
AAO RX
HO HO 0
OH a
X-13 X=14 0 5 0 OH OH
HOTS 8200 0?
OH H /3C CH 3 — — 0
X-15 7 x-16 17
OHon 0
H3C X-18 ) OH
X-19 77
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
HO. __O OH HO OH =H wo JAS 0=_s 5 0 SN 0 x-20 9) X=21 Ho—%_H 0
X-22 10) 0 0 .
HO { “OH 01 OH
OH
— 0
X=23 X-24 0
ANA AAA
HO
X-25 OH 0 oo RE
OH 0
X-26 5 —) & ed
Chiral N
X=27 pad 0
HO 00 HO. .O
OH
0 0 H aa 0 Lng,
X 0 X-29 OH —28 X-30
Q S 0 OH
RN STN x-31 3 9 = 0
Sr N OH . 0
Chiral
X=-32 77a
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
0 0 0 0 L 0 Ho OH 0
CH
T X-34 x-35 “5
Chiral Chiral
HO
X-33 pam 0 0
OH 0 No 0 | 0 ham
Yo HO No
H OH
OFF X-37 X=38 po
X-36 ; ; Oy9%h 0 TA 0 o OH ~ (~ OH OH Q CHs o<y-N
HO CH3 _>q (SGA SV. 9 07 0 CHz OH Chiral
X-39 0 X—40 mc Neh, X—41 0
OH Ser " CH "wo nl —43 0
Neds OH H3C OH
Se Ho” =X on Tou
HO HO S J 0 ; ! > CO s 0 OH
X-45 X—46 —<¢
Chiral H3C = OH ()
X—47 X—48 770
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
HO 0 oe Ln CH3
OH X-49 oF HO A on OH
FX 2 0 A N 0 HO 07"
N S-S N 0 0 0 ad 0 F Chiral HO 0 0 - X=aT X=-52 chiral FF
X-=-50
ZL \ 0
HN N, 0 N, o NN ~° a; i a /%, OH
OH OH X-55
HO Chiral HO chiral ;
X-53 X-54 0 0 0) OH
OH
0 0 x 1 2 Lo or o HC" 0 on © 0 O : X—57 Chiral
H3C X-58
X-56 o 0
Wat HO 0 0 0 chiral X-60
X-59 0
AN Ne~o~Ap OH N wv?
HO Tr 0 Chiral
X=61 X-62 77¢c
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
H3C CH H3C 0 0 OH A I
ZT 0% CH HC OH 3 3
HO S—S 0 HO Y 0 y 2 Chiral X-65
X—~63 yogq HO
OH
HO PF POPP PP
HO HO o
X—67 0 X—-66 OH
HO 0
SIX 5/70 N © HO Chiral 0 X-69 X=70 ’ OH 0 0 i
HO oor 0 FFFFFFFF po 0 a HH
Chiral S HO FFFFFFFF OH
X=71 X=72 X-73 oH HO
HO A 0TN 0 HO, 0)
YSN Jo; ° iS Ho" 0
O0./ OH X—75 X-76
X=74 0 0
OH OH
0 0
H3C HO HO
X=77 X~-78 0 0 X=79 77d }
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
0
Ad Cl 1
Oo_N
H3C~Y hd Ay Os Mn Ay
CHs O jos bio
Chiral 0 Chiral 5 vo80 OC od yogi 07 oH 0 0 0 OH
A OH
0 N 1 HO ASA 0
HO. 2. _N.
TY OH HO OH Ho” S0
Chiral X-83 84
X—82 X-8 77e
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
0
X-85 OH
CH3
CL 0 CH3 Hy OH H oy " Y OH 3g 5 | 0 0
HO 11, “ony OH chiral YX on H
HOO X-86 Oh y_g7 X-88
HO OOH 0 0 _N 0 0 Aon ye
CJ] , Hu, ng - oP Ay 0
LL, Tey YA vss x-g0 I x-91 0, 5 ; 0
H H,C ! 3 OH 2 Ss
X-93 ©
CHy OH X-594
Chiral
X-92 0 FF FF FF FF FF
Soe a 0 wo Non C] 7 FF FF FF FF FF 0
OH X-97
X-95 6 78
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
o_OH HO 0 0 H3C CH3 H3C CH3 A + 0
YY eI
AN 0 0 0 HO
X-98 X-99 x-100 °
H
0:57 J - Or FF FF FF FF
H3C 0 H “—OH Hos ANAS
HO Xx=101 0 O FF FF FF O 0
C OH °, a4 0 OH N orl, mre T(E
X-105
Cl X—=104 0
X-106 0 N ?
N OH
( §:: C §:: 0 OH
OH N
N 0 HOPS SANS 09 o 0 x-108 ~~ X7109 cr
X-107 “ 78a
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 28)
Vv i 0 OF
C1 OH 0 cH A—CH3
Chiral Br X-111 Chiral Hs 0 Q OH OH.
HO 0 0
OH 0 OH - OH ) 0 1668 g) . 8 HO —0 oH 0 0 , 4
X—-114 HO OH HO OH
X=113 Chiral
X-115 0 Q HO N
N, 0
Oy Ce R¥3 “0 0 OH OH
Chiral
X-116 J 0 X-117
OH HO 0 0 OH oo _ OH Ho AA 5
SY OH OH
X-119 0 0 OH 0
Hoss HO Wa OH
X-121 Es 0
X=-122 0 0
HO 0 0 0 0
Noss NN, ov oH HO oN & 0 Theor wiz A chiral © HN y-125 X=126
X—123 78b
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
OH 0 OH
NNN
Cl 0 X-128
OM " OH py OH ” 0 0 YOO, ira. X—-129
X-127 HOO Hy , 05, OH, 0 Hi, . OH on NOH cH H HOO HO
HOO X—131 OH
X-130 X=132
Disulfonyl Halides i : 4 0 0 0 I il : rd cl 0 1 \y v—_ § X—134 0 0
S-F Osd \.Cl 0 0 i / A : eles
X-133 0 £0 X—135
Doe
I} 2 Se / A 4 0 0a JC 2s < 2H X=137 co JF
J X—138
X—136
F. p A LO Oy 4 A Cl onto oq v_0 0 s*=
X-139 x-140 ) 0% \ 0 o 8c X—141
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 28)
0=S5=0 - H3C. CH3 0, cf ~~ x 1 P 07 7 Cl 403°
H3C JF X—143 0 X-144
X—142 0 cl i ~
Noo F 3 5=0 » Z a DUNG es Uy
NINN ) N ® 0 0
X-145 X-146 ai
Cr 75, 0
Oy 20 Cho C1] LP og pi QF 0 a
J ct A $ S< S Sp 0=57Q o 0 7 "Cl 4 A) Yo#
H3C CH3 0 F. 0 CY 2
CHs X-148 me
X— 147 X~149 X=150 ¢ (IU
CIN J I_ct Clg | cr 2° S 77 S 7 NN . 0 0 1 o> i xX-152 x-151 © 0
Dialdeh ydes 0 2 Ohh haa J 0 X—154 ? X-153 “cH
CH3
Oa EN 9 0 . « - X-156 0 x-155 0 [J 2 0
XX wy
N
£7 ’
H
X-157 "3 X~158 78d
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
_0 = Oa re LT 0 0. J X-160 Np
CH
HC x-159 © 0
Cx, , BS
Q 0 o o N=
Pon P LO TES 0 ""0 YY
X-163 CH 0 0
X ea ey : B
I : OH ¢ x-165 Yo X1660 X=167 =0 H3C<, /\ : o HO
X-168 SY Red Cd 0 ; SO
X=169 X-170 OH oo 0 He X=171 adh Ty o AN _o
X-172 HO™N\== X—174 7
X-173 ol cl | cl or _
Dinalides ~ or 3 X=177
Og On pO 0” 0 X-176
X-175
Br NY" Br Br NN"
In; OH oH
X-178 X-179 X—180 79
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
, } CON On cl ® Cl
Ee a NN» 0 $
X-181 X-182 X-183
Cl
I~ ~1 Br~g, i cl
X-184 X-185 2 on ~
N
Bro ~~ ~~~ ~Or ALT Ng }
X-187 8B Br , X18 le
I ~1
OS Br X—-192 0 X-191
Br AAA gr Jn Wn SN
X=193 BC yet YF
Br a Ma NC
Di Vig F i 3 oT gr
Br X—-196 X=197 Br
X—195 X-198
I ~~~ I H3C, Er
Br NONE X-200 H 2%, OA
X-199 CHzo ar cl X=201 0 Br
X Bry oH ng Bra ~~ AE 0” er Br ¢ ar. Br
X—204 X-205 ~T 0 N
X-202 X-203 0 X—206
H3C Ong ~Br Ie ao a Bro ~~or
H3C— Ho 3°70 gf Br X-209 1 = X=210 g
X-208 A 0 /
X=207 Gr. Br ~_0 0
ECON A )
X-211 X-212 | X~213 X-214 79a
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 25)
Diisocyonates 0
N ZZ 0 0
A a Ve a Va aN 0” Y A,
X=215 0 X-216 1 / Ao 0 N N aa
H3C=0 0—CH3 X-218 0
X=-217 fr om Ef ,
H3C 0 0 CO
J On Sy 4g ® NZ py a
X-220 X=221 ~
Q, : 0 0 0
Eu We
Br CH3 = = ; CH
X-222 H3C CH3 X-224 0 X=223 Pe
N
\ N
N Ir 0 A
N
J i AN x-227 0 X=-226 0 ® CHz ~~ CH3
CA, 0 a alae Sent
X—228 ol . CH3 Ne \ = US or a J = 0 0 0 4 cl c/ CH3 1
N
— | X=-231 X=-232
X=230 ) J 79b 0
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
0 0 0 2 IAN ZZ 0 \ ~~ a So ROS
H3C _ 0 X-233 BC Hy, X-235 oo X-234 3 0 0 0 CH3
CH3 CH3
N I CH3 | CH3\/
X 0 N N ~236 H3C cus N N a 0 0 0 _ ! chs | X-237
N X-238 : CHsz
H3C CH; : 4 /
N
) \ / x by WOO 0 cl cl
N X-240
AR 0 0
No~~ MN yi oN 0 0 X-241 0% x-242 0 { CH
J _ H
N N==0 CH3 oS (> ® “Y
N Ox 0 _ H3C N
X—243 3 H3C I NNW
X-244 X-245 CH3 80
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
0 ~ YN 0 0 aN YAN \ J
N 0 \ J/
Na~""" N Nie py 7 H3C 0 X=246 | X-247 0 X-248
Diamines : oh NT O~"~ 0 ~-N OO
X-249 —~ N HN ANN N a" y Nn [Y X-251 cH
A N= HEN J
X—250 HaN N X~252
Cts [75 cm 3 : N
NH.
X~253 Cts S85 cris 2
HaN BP N
X—254 NH2 X-256
HIN Oa pan)
NH»
X—255 N_257
HoN NH
HoN NH9 260
X-258 X-259 -
H3C a Nae~~y Se, HIN ~_ Oa NH
X-261 X-262
HoN NH» & Nz < SA
X-263 HoN X—264 X=265 80a
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
NH2 8 CUS 3
N OH X-267 oH
X-266 0 © um LCL
HO HoN NH»
Bi HON ~~ “CH X-270 : x-268 HO X-289
HC CHz
H3C nN CH3
Y hl" HoN nH, C3 cH 2 HN A~ "2 X-273
J
X=271 , X72 :
NH,
H3C TNA HoN ng 2
H ? H3C Ch iv JJ NH
Sv X-274 H3C 277
X-275
CH3
CH J NH, fo @ X-279 xe
X=-276 H
NH, NH HO ~~ Ny 0
Ho I Tg Wee /~\ ~OT © 0 H- NH
X-281 J & _ 2
X-=282
NH.
HoN NN we 98 2
X-283 Nz - 80 X-284
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
HIN ~ Ono On~ NH,
X-285
ASE NASA CH HON «~~ M2
X-286 X—287
NP
Hol 5 HIN ~~ Han TI Wry ry H3C CHj
X-289 260
X-288 NH,
Crown
PO, X=292
X-291 ) 0 0
W/
S
HON ~~ Lr TL
NH. 2 5 NH. - HRN
X-293 5 204 >
X-=-295 NHo NH 00
X-296
HN X-297 NH
H3C CH
IR ghd HIN ~~ NH2
X-298 299
Sud HoN NH HoN NHo da, OU
HoN NHo _ .
X=-300 X=J301 X-302 80c
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
OOO men
HN © NHo X-304
X-303
CHz ~~ NH of HoN ~~ y
X=-305 “IN CH3 X-307
Chiral
X-306
NFHo NH 2 2 = CH3 CH3 ye OFOT 0
CH3 'CH3
X-308 X-309 0 0 HN ~~~ a Com NH
HoN NH X=311 2 X-310 2
NHo
Ci [ a HaN CH3 ¢ ne X JC
CL, o ws
Chiral X-313 NH
X=312 X-314 80d
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
FA Yaa Fe a Fa N +H
HoN NH, Pi 3
X-315 H3C 7 NT"
X=316 110 on, cl ca
H3C
Corey, . Sol
X=317 C] I
N
Chiral cH
X-318
HoN HoN 2 2 — NH.
X-319 he oy. Z
X-320
H+C :
J ~NSASA o HN SNA,
X-=-321 X-322
H3C ~~~ NA HsC CH3 H,N NH.
N CHz "37" SNS 73 2 Seg N2
X=323 X-324 X-325
Diols HO
CH
Het /3 \
Gr ® Br “ $ on :
HO ~o0 0 X-327 ©
Br Br OH 0
HO“ N ~~ OH © x-328 X-329
N a1 \_ OH
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
HO ~~ "NN 0 y ~~ OH
X=331 : Sy HO 2 dg"
OH X-332
X-330 0 0 0
CH
NN 3
LAr CH vo IK on ~0 CH;
OH “oH :
X~-334 :
X-333 4 on on
N
Sor hh I Cr ~"oH
H3C i
CHz OH
X-335 X-336 X=337 0 OL _~..
X-338 X-339
OH CH3
FF HC
FE F J OH
FF - HO
J FF CH
F FF CHy
FF
HO X—341
X-340 oH J.
OH
H3C 0 CH OH
X=342 X=343 177 Rd Sa a Ne Ng OH
X-344 8la
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
: Ho ~~ OH iN
X-345 HO oH
X—-346 ) op oH
OH
X=347 X-348 X—-349 0 0 | OH O~on
ANIA NAN
X-350 X-351
HO NNSA HK :
HO Roh OH
X-352
X-353
OH
F F N
F p HO OU OH
F F F
£F X-355
HO X-354
OH
NNN yp X-357 gag HO 7 "NN oy
X=-356 X-=358
OH Ap OH
HiC™ x_359 x-360 81b
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
OH
X-361
X-362
A A OH oH vo) UL X-365
X-363 CH3
X-364
OH OH
OH
HO Lr PON CH
X-366
X=-367 0) 0) a
HO = "No NN No ory)
X-368 HO. 0
X-369
HO NNN oy OH OH
X-370 he” = cH
C] X=371
Co OQ
OH
X=372 ® » OH ~ X-373
OH
HO HO NY
CH; ~~ CHy
X-375
X-374
OH
8lc
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
CH3 i
OH
ANN OH CH
X-376 HO cn. X=377 X-378 3
X-379 X-380
ASe~ HAO ~~ OH
X-381 X-362 X-383 — HO a.
HO” “OH SAN AH
X—-384 F
X-385
Dithiols
HS HS HS
NNN NNN 5
SH SH 1) >
SH pes
CH
HS J HS NTN SH
X-389
SH xX-391
X-390 81d
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
0 HS
A OO oi po 0 X-393 HS
X=J392 X-394
SH CH SH SH
HS OH po ; C0)
X-395 H3C CHz
HS. oe gd?
X-398 S OH HS SH cH X~399 X—400
CH 0 7 SN HS ~SH
HS ARNE
] 0 X—403
SH X—-402
X—-401 0 0 ; us ow
X=404 X—-405 X—-406
HS _~ c~SH HS ~~_5H HS NONE
X-407 X—-408 X-409
OH SH on Ho
I SH oO AAA AAA
H. , HS % HS Sl
S TY T Ee 0 ~~ H
X—-410 X—411 X—-412 X—413
HS SH Hon us oH
Rel 0 NA ~
OH Sy Chiral OH
X-414 X~415 X=416
HS SH
0" mls
S X-418
X—=417 £2
SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)
Pharmaceutical Formulations
When employed as pharmaceuticals, the compounds of this invention are usually administered in the form of pharmaceutical compositions. These compounds can be administered by a variety of routes including oral, rectal, ) transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, and intranasal. These compounds are effective as both injectable and oral compositions. Such : compositions are prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at Jeast one active compound. Preferred compounds are those which have receptor binding activity toward one or more GABA recertors at concentrations of less than 1 mM.
This invention also includes pharmaceutical compositions which contain. as the active ingredient, one or more of the compounds described herein associated with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. In making the compositions of this invention, the active ingredient is usually mixed with an excipient, diluted by an excipient or enclosed within such a carricr which can be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper or other container. When the excipient serves as a diluent, it can be a solid, semi-solid, or liquid material, which acts as a vehicle, carrier or medium for the active ingredient. Thus, the compositions can be in the form of tablets, pills, powders, lozenges, sachets, cachets, elixirs, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, syrups, aerosols (as a solid or in a liquid medium), ointments containing, for example, up to 10% by weight of the active compound, soft and hard gelatin capsules, suppositories, sterile injectable solutions, and sterile packaged powders.
In preparing a formulation, it may be necessary to mill the active compound to provide the appropriate particle size prior to combining with the other ingredients. If the active compound is substantially insoluble, it ordinarily is milled to a particle size of less than 200 mesh. If the active compound is substantially water soluble, the particlc size is normally adjusted by milling to provide a substantially uniform distribution in the formulation, e.g., about 40 mesh.
Some examples of suitable excipients include lactose, dextrose, sucrose, . sorbitol, mannitol, starches, gum acacia, calcium phosphate, alginates, tragacanth, gelatin, calcium silicate, microcrystalline cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, } cellulose, sterile water, syrup, and methyl cellulose. The formulations can additionally include: lubricating agents such as talc, magnesium stearate, and mineral oil; wetting agents; emulsifying and suspending agents; preserving agents such as methyl- and propylhydroxy-benzoates; sweetening agents; and flavoring agents. The compositions of the invention can be formulated so as to provide quick, sustained or delayed release of the active ingredient after administration to the patient by employing procedures known in the art.
The compositions are preferably formulated in a unit dosage form, each dosage containing from about 0.001 to about 1 g, more usually about 1 to about 30 mg, of the active ingredient. The term "unit dosage forms" refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient. Preferably, the compound of formula I above is employed at no more than about 20 weight percent of the pharmaceutical composition, more preferably no more than about 15 weight percent, with the balance being pharmaceutically inert carrier(s).
The active compound is effective over a wide dosage range and is generally administered in a pharmaceutically effective amount. It, will be understood, however, that the amount of the compound actually administered will be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered and its relative activity, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
For prepanng solid compositions such as tablets, the principal active ingredient is mixed with a pharmaceutical excipient to form a solid preformulation composition containing a homogencous mixture of a compound of the present invention. When referring to these preformulation compositions as homogeneous, ) itis meant that the active ingredient is dispersed evenly throughout the composition so that the composition may be readily subdivided into equally effective unit dosage forms such as tablets, pills and capsules. This solid preformulation is then subdivided into unit dosage forms of the type described above containing from, for example, 0.1 to about 500 mg of the active ingredient of the present invention.
The tablets or pills of the present invention may be coated or otherwise compounded to provide a dosage form affording the advantage of prolonged action.
For example, the tablet dr pill can comprise an inner dosage and an outer dosage component, the latter being in the form of an envelope over the former.
The two components can be separated by an enteric layer which serves to resist disintegration in the stomach and permit the inner component to pass intact into the duodenum or to be delayed in release. A variety of materials can be used for such enteric layers or coatings, such materials including a number of polymeric acids and mixtures of polymeric acids with such materials as shellac, cetyl alcohol, and cellulose acetate.
The liquid forms in which the novel compositions of the present invention may be incorporated for administration orally or by injection include aqueous solutions, suitably flavored syrups, aqueous or oil suspensions, and flavored emulsions with edible oils such as com oil, cottonseed oil, sesame oil, coconut oil, or peanut oil, as well as elixirs and similar pharmaceutical vehicles.
Compositions for inhalation or insufflation include solutions and suspensions in pharmaceutically acceptable, aqueous or organic solvents, or mixtures thereof, and powders. The liquid or solid compositions may contain } suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients as described supra. Preferably the compositions are administered by the oral or nasal respiratory route for local or ] systemic effect. Compositions in preferably pharmaceutically acceptable solvents may be nebulized by use of inert gases. Nebulized solutions may be inhaled directly from the nebulizing device or the nebulizing device may be attached to a face mask tent, or intermittent positive pressure breathing machine. Solution, suspension, or powder compositions may be administered, preferably orally or nasally, from devices which deliver the formulation in an appropriate manner.
The following formulation examples illustrate representative pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention.
Formulation Example 1
Hard gelatin capsules containing the following ingredients are prepared:
Quantity
Ingredient (mg/capsule)
Active Ingredient 30.0
Starch 305.0
Magnesium stearatc 50
The above ingredients are mixed and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 340 mg quantities.
Formulation Example 2
A tablet formula is prepared using the ingredients below:
Quantity
Ingredient (mg/tablet)
Active Ingredient 25.0
Cellulose, microcrystalline 200.0
Colloidal silicon dioxide 10.0
Stearic acid 5.0
The components are blended and compressed to form tablets, each weighing 240 mg.
Formulation Example 3 :
A dry powder inhaler formulation is prepared containing the following components: :
I i Weight 9
Active Ingredient 3
Lactose 95
The active ingredient is mixed with the lactose and the mixture is added to a dry powder inhaling appliance.
Formulation Example 4
Tablets, each containing 30 mg of active ingredient, ‘are prepared as follows:
Quantity
Ingredient (mg/tablet)
Active Ingredient 30.0 mg
Starch 45.0 mg
Microcrystalline cellulose 35.0 mg
Polyvinylpyrrolidone (as 10% solution in sterile water) 4.0 mg
Sodium carboxymethyl starch 45mg
Magnesium stearate 0.5 mg
Talc 10mg
Total 120 mg
: The active ingredient, starch and cellulose are passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve and mixed thoroughly. The solution of polyvinylpyrrolidone is . mixed with the resultant powders, which are then passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve. The granules so produced are dried at 50° to 60°C and passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve. The sodium carboxymethyl starch, magnesium stearate, and talc, previously passed through a No. 30 mesh U.S. sieve, are then added to the granules which, after mixing, are compressed on a tablet machine to yield tablets each weighing 120 mg.
Eommulation Example S
Capsules, each containing 40 mg of medicament are made as follows:
A Quantity
Ingredient (mg/capsule)
Active Ingredient . 40.0mg
Starch © 109.0 mg
Magnesium stearate 10mg
Total 150.0 mg
The active ingredient, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 150 mg quantities.
Fomnulation Example 6
Suppositories, each containing 25 mg of active ingredient are made as follows: :
Ingredient Amount
Active Ingredient 25 mg
Saturated fatty acid glycerides to 2,000 mg
The active ingredient is passed through a No. 60 mesh U.S. sieve and suspended in the saturated fatty acid glycerides previously melted using the minimum heat necessary. The mixture is then poured into a suppository mold of nominal 2.0 g capacity and allowed to cool.
E lation Example 7 .
Suspensions, each containing 50 mg of medicament per 5.0 mL dose are made as follows: :
Ingredient Amount
Active Ingredient : 50.0 mg
Xanthan gum 4.0 mg
Sodium carboxymethyl cellulose (11%)
Microcrystalline cellulose (89%) 50.0 mg
Sucrose 1.75 ¢
Sodium benzoate 10.0 mg
Flavor and Color q.v.
Purified water to _ - 5.0mL
The active ingredient, sucrose and xanthan gum are blended, passed through a No. 10 mesh U.S. sieve, and then mixed with a previously made solution of the microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose in water. The sodium benzoate, flavor, and color are diluted with some of the water and added with stirring. Sufficient water is then added to produce the required volume.
Formulation Example 8
A formulation may be prepared as follows:
Quantity
Ingredient (mg/capsule)
Active Ingredient 15.0 mg
Starch 407.0 mg
Magnesium stearate 30mg
Total 4250 mg
The active ingredient, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 425.0 mg quantities.
Formulation Example 9 ’ A formulation may be prepared as follows:
Ingredient Quantity
Active Ingredient 5.0mg ) 5 Com Oil 1.0mL
Formulation Example 10 :
A topical formulation may be prepared as follows:
Ingredient Quantity
Active Ingredient 1-10 g
Emulsifying Wax 30g
Liquid Paraffin 20g
White Soft Paraffin to 100g x The white soft paraffin is heated until molten. The liquid paraffin and emulsifying wax are incorporated and stirred until dissolved. The active ingredient is added and stirring is continued until dispersed. The misture is then cooled until solid.
Another preferred formulation employed in the methods of the present invention employs transdermal delivery devices ("patches"). Such transdermal patches may be used to provide continuous or discontinuous infusion of the compounds of the present invention in controiled amounts. The construction and use of transdermal patches for the delivery of pharmaceutical agents is well known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,023,252, issued June 11, 1991, herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. Such patches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of pharmaceutical agents.
Other suitable formulations for use in the present invention can be found in
Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mace Publishing Company, Philadelphia,
PA, 17th ed. (1985).
Utility
The multibinding compounds of this invention are agonists, partial agonists, inverse agonists, partial inverse agonists or antagonists of the GABA receptors, “vhich are known to mediate neurological disorders. Accordingly, the multibinding ’ compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of this invention are useful in the treatment and prevention of various neurological disorders mediated by GABA receptors, such as anxiety, sleep and seizure disorders, and overdoses of benzodiazepine-type drugs, and enhancing alertness and the like.
When used in treating or ameliorating such conditions, the compounds of this invention are typically delivered to a patient in need of such treatment by a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent and an effective amount of at least one compound of this invention. The amount of compound administered to the patient will vary depending upon what compound and/or composition is being administered, the purpose of the administration, such as prophylaxis or therapy, the state of the patient, the manner of administration, and the like. In therapeutic applications, compositions are administered to a patient already suffering from, for example, anxiety, in an amount sufficient to at least partially reduce the symptoms. Amounts effective for this use will depend on the judgment of the attending clinician depending upon factors such as the degree or severity of the disorder in the patient, the age, weight and general condition of the patient, and the like. The pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may contain more than one compound of the present invention.
As noted above, the compounds administered to a patient are in the form of pharmaceutical compositions described above which can be administered by a variety of routes including oral, rectal, transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, etc. These compounds are effective as both injectable and oral deliverable pharmaceutical compositions. Such compositions arc prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at least one active compound. : The multibinding compounds of this invention can also be administered in the form of pro-drugs, i.e., as derivatives which are converted into a biologically active compound in vivo. Such pro-drugs will typically include compounds in which, for example, a carboxylic acid group, a hydroxyl group or a thiol group is converted to a biologically liable group, such as an ester, lactone or thioester group which will hydrolyze in vivo to reinstate the respective group.
The compounds can be assayed to identify which of the multimeric ligand compounds possess multibinding properties. First, one identifies a ligand or mixture of ligands which each contain at least one reactive functionality and a library of linkers which each include at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand. Next, one prepares a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands with the library of linkers under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between the linker and at least two of the ligands.
The multimeric ligand compounds produced in the library can be assayed to identify multimeric ligand compounds which possess multibinding properties.
The method can also be performed using a library of ligands and a linker or mixture of linkers.
The preparation of the multimeric ligand compound library can be achieved by either the sequential or concurrent combination of the two or more stoichiometric equivalents of the ligands with the linkers. The multimeric ligand compounds can be dimeric, for example, homomeric or heteromeric. A heteromeric ligand compound hibrary can be prepared by sequentially adding a first and second ligand.
Each member of the multimeric ligand compound library can be isolated from the library, for example, by preparative liquid chromatography mass spectrometry (LCMS). The linker or linkers can be flexible linkers, rigid linkers, hydrophobic linkers, hydrophilic linkers, linkers of different geometry, acidic linkers, basic linkers, linkers of different polarization and/or polarizability or amphiphilic linkers. The linkers can include linkers of different chain lengths and/or which have different complementary reactive groups. In one embodiment, the linkers are selected to have different linker lengths ranging from about 2 to 100A. The ligand or mixture of ligands can have reactive functionality at different sites on the ligands. The reactive functionality can be, for example, carboxylic acids, carboxylic acid halides, carboxyl esters, amines, halides, pseudohalides, isocyanates, vinyl unsaturation, ketones, aldehydes, thiols, alcohols, anhydrides, boronates, and precursors thereof, as long as the reactive functionality on the ligand is complementary to at least one of the reactive groups on the linker so that a covalent linkage can be formed between the linker and the ligand.
A library of multimeric ligand compounds can thus be formed which possesses multivalent properties.
Multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties can be identified in an iterative method by preparing a first collection or iteration of multimeric compounds by contacting at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands which target the GABA receptors with a linker or mixture of linkers, where the ligand or mixture of ligands includes at least one reactive functionality and the linker or mixture of linkers includes at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand. The ligand(s) and linker(s) are reacted under conditions which form a covalent linkage between the linker and at least two of the ligands. The first collection or iteration of multimeric compounds can be assayed to assess which if any of the compounds possess multibinding properties. The process can be repeated until at least one multimeric compound is found to possess multibinding properties. By evaluating the particular molecular constraints which are imparted or are consistent with imparting multibinding properties to the : multimeric compound or compounds in the first iteration, a second collection or iteration of multimeric compounds which elaborates upon the particular molecular constraints can be assayed, and the steps optionally repeated to further elaborate upon said molecular constraints. For example, the steps can be repeated from between 2 and 50 times, more preferably, between 5 and 50 times.
The following synthetic and biological examples are offered to illustrate this invention and are not to be construed in any way as limiting the scope of this invention. Unless otherwise stated, all temperatures are in degrees Celsius.
In the examples below, the following abbreviations have the following meanings. If an abbreviation is not defined, it has its generally accepted meaning. :
A = Angstroms cm = centimeter
DCC = dicyclohexyl carbodiimide
DMF = N,N-dimethylformamide
DMSO = dimethylsulfoxide
EDTA = ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid g = gram
HPLC = high performance liquid chromatography
MEM = minimal essential medium mg = milligram
MIC = minimum inhibitory concentration min = minute mL = milliliter mm = millimeter mmol = millimol
N = normal
THF = tetrahydrofuran ns = microliters um = microns
Experiments using *H-diazepam or *H-flunitrazepam have demonstrated specific binding sites in CNS membrane preparations that satisfy the criteria for pharmacological receptors, e.g. saturability, reversibility, stereoselectivity and significant correlation with in vivo activities of the drugs in this class. :
Heterogeneity of benzodiazepine receptors has been reported (Klepner et al 1979, : Supavilai and Karobath 1980, Hafely et al 1993, Davies et al 1994).
Tissue preparation
Male Wistar rats are decapitated and the brains rapidly removed. The cerebral cortices are removed, weighed and homogenized with a Potter-Elvejhem homogenizer in 20 volurnes of ice-cold 0.32 M sucrose. This homogenate is centrifuged at 1000 g for 10 min. the pellet is discarded and the supernatant is centrifuged at 30,000 g for 20 min. The resulting membrane pellet is resuspended in 40 volumes of 0.05 M Tris buffer, pH 6.9.
Assay 1 ml 0.05 Tris buffer, pH 6.9 560 ml H,O 70 ml 0.5 M Tris buffer, pH 6.9 50 ml *H-Flunitrazepam 20 ml vehicle (for total binding) or 0.1 mM Clonazepam (for non-specific binding) or appropriate drug concentrations. .300 ml tissue suspension.
The tubes containing *H-flunitrazepam, buffer, drugs and H,O are incubated at 0-4°C in an ice bath. A 300 ml aliquot of the tissue suspension is added to the tubes at 10-second intervals. The timer is started with the addition of the mixture to the first tube. The tubes are then incubated at 0-4°C for 20 min and the assay stopped by vacuum filtration through Whatman ’ GF/B filters. This step is performed at 10-second intervals.
Each filter is immediately rinsed with three 5 ml washes of ice-cold buffer, pH 6.9. . The filters are counted in 10 ml of liquid scintillation counting cocktail.
Specific binding is defined as the difference between total binding and binding in the presence of clonazepam.
Specific binding is approximately 97% of total ligand binding. The percent inhibition at each drug concentration is the mean of triplicate determinations.
IC50 calculations are performed using log-probit analyses. ‘
Chang RSL, Snyder SH (1978) Benzodiazepine receptors: labeling in intact animals with [ *H]-flunitrazepam. Eur J
Pharmacol 48:213-218
Damm HW, Miiller WE, Schlifer U, Wollert U (1978) [ *H)Flunitrazepam: its advantages as a ligand for the identification of benzodiazepine receptors in rat brain membranes.
Res Commun Chem Pathol Pharmacol 22:597-600, Davies MF, Onaivi S, Chen
SW, Maguire PA, Tsai NF, Loew GH (1994) Evidence for central benzodiazepine receptor heterogeneity from behavior tests. Pharmacol Biochem Behav 49:47-56
Hafely WE, Martin JR, Richard JG, Schoch P (1993) The multiplicity of actions of benzodiazepine receptor ligands. Can I Psychiatry 38, Suppl 4:S102-S108 Iversen
LL (1983) Biochemical characterisation of benzodiazepine receptors. In: Trimble
MR (ed.) Benzodiazepines Divided. John Wiley & Sons Ltd. pp 79- 85 Jacqmin P,
Wibo M, Lesne M (1986) Classification of benzodiazepine receptor agonists,
inverse agonists and antagonists using bicuculline in an in vitro test. J Pharmacol (Raris) 17:139-145; Klepner CA, Lippa AS, Benson DI, Sano MC, Beer B (1979)
Resolution in two biochemically and pharmacologically distinct benzodiazepine receptors. Pharmacol Biochem Behav. 11:457-462 Mennini T, Garattini A (1982) .
Benzodiazepine receptors: Correlation with pharmacological respoises in living animals. Life Sci 31:2025-2035; Méhler H, Okada T (1977) Benzodiazepine . receptor: Demonstration in the central nervous system. Science 198:849- 851;
Mahler H, Okada T (1977) Properties of *H-diazepam binding to benzodiazepine receptors in rat cerebral cortex. Life Sci 20:2101-2110;
Mohler H, Richards JG (1983) Benzodiazepine receptors in the central nervous system. In: Costa E (ed) The Benzodiazepines: From Molecular Biology to Clinical
Practice. Raven Press, New York, pp. 93-1 16; Olsen RW (1981) GABA- benzodiazepine-barbiturate receptor interactions. I Neurochem 37:1-13;
Schacht U, Baecker G (1982) Effects of clobazam in benzodiazepine- receptor binding assays Drug Dev. Res. Suppl. 1, 83-93; Speth RC, Wastek GJ,
Johnson PC, Yamamura HI (1978) Benzodiazepine binding in human brain: characterization using [ *H]flunitrazepam. Life Sci 22:859-866; Speth RC, Wastek
GJ, Yamamura HI (1979) Benzodiazepine receptors: Temperature dependence of ’H-diazepam binding. Life Sci 24:351-358; Squires RF, Braestrup C (1977)
Benzodiazepine receptors in rat brain. Nature 266:732-734; Supavilai P. Karobath
M (1980) Heterogeneity of benzodiazepine receptors in rat cerebellum and + hippocampus. Eur I Pharmacol 64:91-93; Sweetnam PM, Tallman JF (1985)
Regional difference in brain benzodiazepine receptor carbohydrates. Mol
Pharmacol 29: 299-306; Takeuchi T, Tanaka S, Rechnitz GA (1992) Biotinylated 1012-S conjugate as a probe ligand for benzodiazepine receptors: characterization of receptor binding sites and receptor assay for benzodiazepine drugs. Anal
Biochem 203: 158-162; Tallman JF (1980) Interaction between GABA and benzodiazepines. Brain Res Bull 5:829-832
Example B: *CI flux
Fresh cortical tissue is homogenized in 10 volumes of cold buffer A (mmol/L:
NaCl 145, KCl 5, MgCl, 4, KH,PO, 1. Hepes 10, ATP 2, adjusted to pH 7.5 by ’ 0.5M Tris-base) and centrifuged for 15mins at 770 g. The pellet is resuspended in buffer B (mmol/l: KCl 100, NaCl 45, the rest identical to buffer A) and again centrifuged for 15mins at 770 g. After another wash cycle in buffer A, the pellet is suspended to a protein concentration of 10.6mg/ml. Before measuring GABA- stimulated chloride flux, aliquots of the membrane suspension containing 1.6mg of protein are preincubated with or without the benzodiazepine under investigation, dissolved in buffer A containing 0.2% BSA for 10mins at 30°C. A prewarmed
GABA and radioactive chloride solution (**Cl’; New England Nuclear; 13.5mCi/g, 1mCi/ml final concentration) is then added to a final volume of 400ml. The reaction mixture is vortexed briefly and incubated for 3s at 30°C. The flux is stopped by adding 4m] of cold buffer A containing 100mM bicuculline and 0.01%
BSA, immediately followed by filtration through Whatman GF/B filters presoaked in 0.1% polyethyleneimine. Tubes and filters are rinsed with 4ml of stop solution, and the filters are further washed with 10 portions of 1ml each. The radioactivity in the tissue retained on the filters is measured in a scintillation counter. Non- specific flux in the absence of GABA is subtracted from each value to obtain the specific GABA-stimulated chloride flux. Further details of this procedure are described in Harris and Allan, Science, 228, 1108-1110 (1985).
E le C: F late test in mi
The four plate test in mice has been described by Boissier et al (1968) as a method for the rapid screening of minor tranquilizers.
Procedure
The test box has the shape of a rectangle (25 x 18 x 16 cm). The floor is covered with 4 identical rectangular metal plates (8 x 11 cm) separated from one another by a gap of 4 mm. The plates are connected to a source of continuous current which applies to 2 adjacent plates a mild electrical shock of 0.35 Ma for 0.5 sec. This evokes a clear flight reaction of the animals. Adult male Swiss albino mice, weighing 17 to 23 g, are randomly divided into different groups. Thirty min before the test the animals are injected intraperitoneally with the test drug or the vehicle. At the beginning of the test, the mouse is gently dropped onto a plate and is allowed to explore the enclosure for 15 sec. After this, every time the animal - crosses from one plate to another, the experimenter electrifies the whole floor for 0.5 sec, which evokes a clear flight-reaction of the mouse which often crosses 2 or 3 plates. If it continues running, no new shock is delivered during the following 3 min.
Evaluation .
The number of times the apparatus is electrified is counted each minute for 10 min. The delivery of shocks decreases dramatically the motor activity. The number of shocks received during the first min is taken as parameter. This number is increased by minor tranquilizers, such as benzodiazepines, but not by neuroleptics and psychoanaleptics. ~itical Ful hod
The test is of value to differentiate minor tranquilizers, such as benzodiazepine anxiolytics, from neuroleptics.
Aron et al., “Evaluation of a rapid technique for detecting minor tranquilizers,” Neuropharmacol,, 10:459-469 (1971)
Boissier et al., "A new method for rapid screening of minor tranquilizers in mice,” Eur J. Pharmacol, 4:145-151 (1968)
Lenégre et al., “Specificity of Piracetam’s anti-amnesic activity in three models of amnesia in the mouse,” Pharmacol Biochem Behay., 29:625-629 (1988)
Simon, “Les Anxiolytiques. Possibilités d’étude chez I’animal,” Actualités pharmacol., 23:47-78 (1970)
Stephens et al., “Abecarnil, a metabolically stable, anxioselective 8-carboline : acting at benzodiazepine receptors,” I. Pharmacol. Exper. Ther. 253: 334-343 (1990)
Example D: Light-dark model
In the light-dark model, exploration of mice or rats is inhibited by bright illumination, which is highly aversive for rodents (Crawley and Goodwin 1980).
The animals are placed on the brightly lit side of a two compartment chamber, and the number of crossings between the light and dark sites are recorded. Anxiolytics produce a dose-dependent increase in crossings.
Procedure
One third of a cage (40 x 60 cm) is darkened with a cover and separated with a wall from the otherwise brightly illuminated area. A round hole (diameter 13 cm) allows the rat to pass from the illuminated to the darkened compartment. The cage is placed on an Animex ® -activity counter. The animals are treated orally with the test compound 30 min prior to the session. At the start of the test the rat is placed in the middle of the illuminated part of the cage. The number of crossings 1s registered during 10 min. Groups of 6-8 animals are used for each dose.
Evaluation
The average number of crossings in the treated groups are compared with the saline treated control.
Critical i hod
It has been shown that a variety of anxiolytics, including diazepam, pentobarbital and meprobamate produce a dose-dependent increase in crossings, whereas non-anxiolytic agents do not have this facilitatory effect. Furthermore, the relative potency of anxiolytics in increasing exploratory behavior in the two- compartment chamber agrees well with the potency found in clinical trials.
Bamnes et al., “Profiles of R(+)/S(~)-Zacopride and anxiolytic agents in a mouse model,” Eur. J. Pharmacol, 218:91-100 (1992) .
Barnes et al., “The effects of umespirone as a potential anxiolytic and antipsychotic agent,” Pharmacol. Biochem. Behav., 40:89-96 (1991)
Blumstein and Crawley, “Further characterisation of a simple, automated exploratory model for the anxiolytic effects of benzodiazepines,” Pharmacol.
Biochem. Behav, 18:37-40 (1983)
Crawley, “Neuropharmacologic specificity of a simple animal model for the behavioral actions of benzodiazepines,” Pharmacol. Biochem. Behav.,1 5:695-699 (1981) :
Crawley and Goodwin “Preliminary report of a simple animal behavior model for the anxiolytic effects of benzodiazepines,” Phammacol. Biochem, Behay., 13:167-170 (1980)
Kauppila et al., “Effects of atipamezole, a novel a2 -adrenoreceptor antagonist, in open-field, plus-maze, two compartment exploratory, and forced swimming tests in rats,” Eur, J. Pharmacol, 205:177-182 (1991)
Schipper et al., “Preclinical pharmacology of Flesinoxan: A potential anxiolytic and antidepressant drug,” Human Psychopharmacol, 6:53-61 (1991)
Treit, “Animal models for the study of anti-anxiety agents: A review,”
Neurosci, Biobehav, Reviews, 9:203-222 (1985)
Example E: Open field test
Interruption of light beams as a measure of movements of rats or mice in a cage (“open field") has been used by many authors such as Dews (1953), Saelens et : al. (1968) Nakatsu and Owen, (1980). Recently developed devices allow measurement of not only general motor activity but also locomotion, rearing and the speed of locomotion (Ericson et al 1991). :
Procedure
The rats are observed in a square open field arena (68 x 68 x 45 cm) equipped with 2 rows of 8 photo cells, sensitive to infrared light, placed 40 and 125 mm above the floor, respectively. The photocells are spaced 90 mm apart and the last photocell in a row is spaced 25 mm from the wall. Measurements are made in the dark in a ventilated, sound-attenuating box. Interruptions of photocell beams can be collected by a microcomputer and the following vanables can be evaluated:
Motor activity: All interruptions of photo beams in the lower rows. Rearing: All interruption of the photo beams in the upper rows. Locomotion: Successive interruptions of photocells in the lower rows when the animal is moving in the same direction. Adult male Sprague-Dawley rats with a weight between 280 and 320 g are used. Drugs are injected subcutaneously 10 to 40 min. before test. The rats are observed for 15 min whereby counts per min. are averaged for 3 min intervals.
Barros et al., “Enhanced detection of hyperactivity after drug withdrawal with a simple modification of the open-field apparatus,” I. Pharmacol. Meth, 26:269-275 (1991)
Becker and Randall, “Effects of prenatal ethanol exposure in C57BL mice on locomotor activity and passive avoidance behavior,” Psychopharmacol., 97:40-44 (1989)
Carlezon et al., “Reversal of both QNX-induced locomotion and habituation decrement is indicative of M1 agonist properties,” Drug Dev. Res., 23:333-339 (1991)
Choi et al., “Caffeine and theophylline analogues: correlation of behavioral : effects with activity as adenosine receptor antagonists and as phosphodiesterase inhibitors,” Life Sci, 43:387-398 (1988)
Crabbe et al., “Environmental variables differentially affect ethanol- stimulated activity in selectively bred mouse lines,” Psychopharmacology 95:103-108 (1988)
Crabbe et al., "Mice genetically selected for differences in open-field activity after ethanol,” U 27:577-581 (1987) :
Crunelli and Bernasconi “A new device to measure different size movements:
Studies on d-amphetamine-induced locomotion and stercotypy,” 1. Pharmacol.
Meth., 2:43-50 (1979)
Dews, “The measurement of the influence of drugs on voluntary activity in mice,” BLL. Pharmacol, 8:46-48 (1953)
Ericson et al., “Photocell measurements of rat motor activity” L_ Pharmacol.
Meth, 25:111-122 (1991)
Fontenay et al., “De trois tests de comportement du rat pour I’etude des medicaments psychotropes,” L_ Pharmacol. (Paris) 1:243-254 (1970)
Example F: Rotarod method
The test is used to evaluate the activity of drugs interfering with motor coordination. In 1956, Dunham and Miya suggested that the skeletal muscle relaxation induced by a test compound could be evaluated by testing the ability of mice or rats to remain on a revolving rod. This forced motor activity has subsequently been used by many investigators. The dose which impairs the ability of 50% of the mice to remain on the revolving rod is considered the endpoint.
Procedure
The apparatus consists of a horizontal wooden rod or mctal rod coated with rubber with 3 cm diameter attached to a motor with the speed adjusted to 2 : rotations per minute. The rod is 75 cm in length and is divided into 6 sections by plastic discs, thereby allowing the simultaneous testing of 6 mice. The rod is in a height of about 50 cm above the table top in order to discourage the animals from jumping off the roller. Cages below the sections serve to restrict the movements of the animals when they fall from the roller. Male mice (CD-1 Charles River strain) with an weight between 20 and 30 g undergo a pretest on the apparatus. Only those animals which have demonstrated their ability to remain on the revolving rod for at least 1 minute are used for the test. The test compounds are administered intraperitoneally or orally. Thirty minutes after intraperitoneal or 60 minutes after oral administration the mice are placed for 1 min on the rotating rod. The number of animals falling from the roller during this time is counted. Using different doses,
ED, values can be calculated. More-over, testing at various time intervals, time- response curves can be obtained. Percent animals falling from the rotarod within the test period is calculated for every drug concentration tested. ED50 is defined as the dose of drug at which 50% of the test animals fall from the rotarod.
Critical assessment of the method
Many central depressive drugs are active in this test. Benzodiazepines, such as diazepam and flurazepam, have ED, values below 1 mg/kg i.p. The activity of neuroleptics, such as chlorpromazine or haloperidol, is in the same range. In this way, the test does not really differentiate between anxiolytics and neuroleptics but can evaluate the muscle relaxant potency in a series of compounds such as the benzodiazepines. Moreover, the test has been used in toxicology for testing neurotoxicity.
Cartmell et al, “A revised rotarod procedure for measuring the effect of antinociceptive drugs on motor function in the rat,” 1 Pharmacol. Meth, 26:149-159 (1991)
Dunham and Miya “A note on a simple apparatus for detecting neurological deficit in rats and mice,” I. Am. Pharmaceut. Assoc..46:208-210 (1957) ’
S Novack and Zwolshen “Predictive value of muscle relaxant models in rats and cats,” I. Pharmacol. Meth., 10: 175-183 (1983)
Saeed and Wooles “Effect of chronically administered methylxanthines on ethanol-induced motor incoordination in mice,” Life Sci, 39:1429-1437 (1986)
Example G: Potentiation of hexobarbital sleeping time
The test is used to elucidate CNS-active properties of drugs. Not only hypnotics, sedatives, and tranquilizers but also antidepressants at high doses are known to prolong hexobarbital induced sleep after a single dose of hexobarbital.
The loss of righting reflex is measured as the criterion for the duration of hexobarbital-induced sleeping time. Mice are used in this test, since metabolic elimination of hexobarbital is rapid in this species.
Procedure
Groups of 10 male NMRI-mice with an average weight of 18-22 g are used.
They are dosed orally, i.p. or s.c. with the test compound or the reference standard (e.g. 3 mg/kg diazepam p.o.) or the vehicle. Thirty min after i.p. or s.c. injection or 60 min after oral dosing, 60 mg/kg hexobarbital is injected intravenously. The animals are placed on their backs on a warmed (37°C pad and the duration of loss of the righting reflex (starting at the time of hexobarbital injection) is measured until they regain their righting reflexes. Injection of 60 mg/kg hexobarbital usually causes anesthesia for about 15 min. If there is any doubt as to the reappearance of the righting reflex, the subject is placed gently on its back again and, if it rights itself within one minute, this time is considered as the endpoint. ED, is de-fined as the dose of drug leading to a 100% prolongation in duration of anesthesia in 50% of the animals.
Balazs and Grice, “The relationship between liver necrosis and pentobarbital : sleeping time in rats,” Toxicol. Appl. Pharmacol, 5:387-391 (1963)
Harris and Uhle, “Enhancement of amphetamine stimulation and prolongation of barbiturate depression by a substituted pyrid[3,4-b}indole } derivative,” I Pharmacol. Exp, Ther. 132:251-257 (1961)
Lim, “Animal techniques for evaluating hypnotics. In: Nodine JH Siegler PE (eds.) Animal and Clinical Pharmacologic Techniques in Drug Evaluation,” Year
Book Medical Publ, Inc., Chicago, pp 291-297 (1964)
Mason, “Hypnotics and general anaesthetics. In: Laurence DR, Bacharach AL (eds) Evaluation of Drug Activities: Pharmacometrics. Academic Press, London and New York, pp 261-286 (1964) i
Example H: Withdrawal syndrome in dependent mice
DBA/2J mice (12-20g) are treated orally twice daily with test compounds for 17 days. 5 hours after the last dose, the low efficacy benzodiazepine receptor inverse agonist, sarmazenil (Ro 15-3505), is injected into a tail vein of the conscious mice. Each mouse is then observed for 30mins for the appearance of tremor, wild running, clonic and/or tonic convulsions.
Example I: Step-through
This test uses normal behavior of mice and rats. These animals avoid bright light and prefer dim illumination. When placed into a brightly illuminated space connected to a dark enclosure, they rapidly enter the dark compartment and remain there. The standard technique was developed for mice by Jarvik and Kopp (1967) and modified for rats by King and Glasser (1970). It is widely used in testing the effects of memory active compounds (Fekete and de Wied, 1982, Hock and
McGaugh, 1985, Hock et al 1989, Hock 1994).
Procedure
Mice and rats of either sex are used. The test apparatus consists of a small chamber connected to a larger dark chamber via a guillotine door. The small chamber is illuminated with a 7 W/12 V bulb. The test animals are given an : acquisition trial followed by a retention trial 24 h later. In the acquisition trial the animal is placed in the illuminated compartment at a maximal distance from the guillotine door, and the latency to enter the dark compartment is measured.
Animals that do not step through the door within a cut-off time: 90 s (mice) or 180 sec (rats) are not used. Immediately after the animal enters the dark compartment, the door is shut automatically and an unavoidable footshock (Footshock: 1 mA; 1 sec — mice; 1.5 mA; 2 sec - rat) is delivered. The animal is then quickly removed (within 10 sec) from the apparatus and put back into its home cage. The test procedure is repeated with or without drug. The cut-off time on day 2 1s 300 sec (mice) or 600 sec (rats), respectively. The time to step-through during the leaming phase is measured and the time during the retention test is measured. In this test a prolongation of the step-through latencies is specific to the experimental situation.
An increase of the step-through latency is defined as learning.
Banfi et al., “A screening method for substances potentially active on learning and memory,” 1 Pharmacol. Meth., 8:255-263 (1982)
Fekete and deWied, “Potency and duration of action of the ACTH 4-9 analog (ORG 2766) as compared to ACTH 4-10 and [D-Phe 7 JACTH 4-10 on active and passive avoidance behavior of rats,” Pharmacol. Biochem. Behav. 16:387-392 (1982)
Fine et al., “Cholinergic ventral forebrain grafts into the neocortex improve passive avoidance memory in a rat model of Alzheimer disease,” Proc. Nall. Acad.
Sci. USA, 82:5227-5230 (1985)
Fisher et al., “(x)-cis-2-Methyl-spiro( 1,3-oxathiolane-5,3)quinuclidine, an
M1 selective cholinergic agonist, attenuates cognitive dysfunctions in an animal model of Alzheimer’s disease,” I. Pharmacol, Exp, Ther., 257:392-403 (1991)
Hock, “Involvement of nitric oxide formation in the action of losartan (DUP 753): effects in an inhibitory avoidance model,” Behav, Brain. Res., 61:163-167 (1994)
Hock et al., “Effects of the novel compound, Hoe 065, upon impaired learning and memory in rodents,” Eur. I. Pharmacol., 171:79-85 (1989)
Hock and McGaugh, “Enhancing effects of Hoe 175 on memory in mice,”
Psychopharmacalogy. 86:114-117 (1985)
Jarvik and Kopp, “An improved one-trial learning situation in mice,”
Psychol. Rep, 21:221-224 (1967)
King and Glasser, “Duration of electroconvulsive shock-induced retrograde amnesia in rats,” Physiol, Behav, 5:335-339 (1970)
Rush and Streit, “Memory modulation with peripherally acting cholinergic drugs,” Psychopharmacology, 106: 375-382 (1992)
Wan et al, “Changes in heart rate and body temperature during passive avoidance behavior in rats,” Physiol. Behav.. 47:493-499 (1990)
PREPARATIVE EXAMPLES ]
Example 1: Preparation of 6-(2-bromophenyl)-8-fluoro-l-hydroxymethvil-4H- imidazo(1,5-a}(1,4]benzodiazepine-3-carboxamide (3).
Step 1. :
A mixture of 7-chloro-5-(2-fluorophenyl)-alpha-hydroxyimino-3H-1,4- benzodiazepine-2-acetic acid, ethyl ester (Walser, A., et al., 1. Heterocyclic Chem., 23, 1303-14 (1986); 4 mmols), Raney nickel (1.5 g), THF (40 mL), ethanol (4 mL, and 20% ammonia (v/v) in methanol (0.4 L) is hydrogenated at atmospheric pressure until hydrogen consumption ceases. The catalyst is removed by filtration and the filtrate is concentrated. The residue is dissolved in methylene chloride (10 mL) and ethanol (10 mL) to which is added glycolaldehyde dimer (0.5 g). The solution is stirred for 120 minutes at which time activated Mn0, (1.5 g) is added and stirring is continued another hour. Solids are removed by filtration and the filtrate is concentrated to give crude product. The desired product is obtained in pure form after chromatography.
Step 2.
The product obtained from the preceding reaction is suspended in 6 N HCl (20 mL) and is heated on a steam bath until the reaction is complete as determined by TLC. The solution is evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue is digested in hot water (5 mL) containing sodium acetate (0.8 g), giving the crude product as a crystalline solid. Recrystallization from ethanol-water gives the pure carboxylic acid.
Step 3.
A mixture of the carboxylic acid (3 mmols) from the preceding reaction with phosphorous pentachloride (4 mmols) in methylene chloride (75 mL) is stirred at : room temperature for 3 hr. Ammonia gas is bubbled through the mixture until the ) mixture is basic. A concentrated aqueous ammonia solution (10 mL) is added and the mixture is stirred. The reaction is followed by TLC and when complete, the. organic layer is separated, washed with water, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired product 3 is obtained after purification by HPLC.
Example 2: Preparation of 8-chloro-l-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-6-phenyl-4H- s-triazolo[4,3-a][1,4]benzodiazepine (11).
A solution of 8-chloro-l-methyl-6-phenyl-4H-s-triazolo[4,3- a][1,4]benzodiazepine-4-carboxylic acid, ethyl ester (Hester, I, J.B.; etal. J. Med
Chem. 1980, 23, 643-7; 2 mmols) in THF (10 mL) is stirred with LiBH, (5 mmols) under an inert atmosphere at RT. The progress of the reaction is monitored by TLC and when the reaction is complete, water (1 mL) is added and the mixture stirred to destroy excess hydride reagent. Solvent is removed under reduced pressure and the residue is partitioned between water and CH,Cl,. The layers are separated and the aqueous layer is further extracted with CH,Cl,. The combined organic extracts are dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired 8-chloro-1-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-6-phenyl-4H-s- triazolo[4,3-a][1,4]benzodiazepine (11) is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 3: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1, and the ligand, L, is the benzodiazepine nucleus of imidazenil linked through the carboxamide group to the linker X.
Formula I compound of type, az TA 0]
Wa | , HNCH,—(@CH Py
Ry NAN
Ry 1 .
P. 0573982 Al i
E
’ 0)
Q R, Ry th Nx
N it | SI 3 — —_ N—C =e NCH, Sc ha 0) BON
Rj =N Ro.
Ry 2 2 C
A solution of 6-(2-bromophenyl)-8-fluoro-4H-imidazo(1,5- a](1,4]benzodiazepine-3-carbonyl chloride (1, E.P. 0 573 982 Al; 2 mmols) in
CH,Cl, (5 mL) containing pyridine (0.5 mL) is stirred in an inert atmosphere. To ’ this solution is added 1,6-diaminohexane (1 mmol) and stirring is continued. The
S progress of the reaction is monitored by TLC and when the reaction is complete, water and additional CH,Cl, are added, the mixture is shaken, the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is further extracted with CH,Cl,. The combined organic extracts are dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula I compound [2, wherein R =-(CH,),~; R, =H; R,; =F; and R,. = Br] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 4: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein pis 2, q is 1, and the ligand, L, is the benzodiazepine nucleus of imidazenil linked through a C-1 methylene group to the linker X.
Formula I compound of type, BZ —2-B
C—NR|R ~{ ne at 4g + BrCH, —{(&)—CH,Br —_—
Ry ~N DMF g Ry : 3 . H,
QO Ng CHO -cu,—G)—C—ocw, N_Q
RRN—C— J hg JC—NRR
NN ) Nf -
Ry Ry
Oo. 0
Sodium hydnde (2 mmols) is added to a solution of 6-(2-bromophenyl)-8- fluoro-hydroxymethyl-4H-imidazo(1,5-a]{ 1,4]benzodiazepine-3-carboxamide (3, 2 mmols) in dry DMF (5 mL) stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 1, 6dibromohexane (1 mmol) in dry DMF (1 mL) and the resulting : mixture is stirred, warmed and monitored for reaction by TLC. Aftei the reaction occurs, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with CH,Cl, (3 x 20 mL) and the combined organic extracts are back-washed with water. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula 1 compound (4, wherein R =-(CH,),-; Rl =R2 =H; R; =F; and R2' = Br] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 5: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1, and the ligand, L, is the imidazopyridine nucleus of zolpidem linked through the carboxamide group to the linker X.
Formula I compound of type, c-z—— Z:C
ANN Ry CH,Cl,
Cr y/ R; + HNCH, — (CH NH a
Rg Ry y
O . 5 Cl
J. Med. Chem.1997, 40, 3109-18. Jew N 9
Rs Rs x NZ NN ~
Rg ) Rg 10) NCH, -& CH;N, 0
R, Ry 6
A solution of 6-methyl-2-(4-methylphenyl)imidazo[1,2-a]pyridine-3-acety} chloride (5, Trapani, G.; et. al., J. Med. Chem. 1997, 40, 3109-18; 2 mmols) in
CH,Cl, (5 mL) containing pyridine (0.5 mL) is stirred in an inert atmosphere. To this solution is added N,N-dimethyl-1,8-diaminooctane (1 mmol) and stirring is continued. The progress of the reaction is monitored by TLC and when the reaction : is complete, water and additional CH,Cl, arc added, the mixture is shaken, the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is further extracted with CH,CI,. The combined organic extracts weredried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula I compound [6, wherein R = -(CH,),-; R; = R; = R,; = CH,] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 6: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1, and the ligand, L, is the imidazopyridine nucleus of zolpidem linked through a C- 4' methylene group to the linker X. )
Formula I compound of type, D-Z,~g)—24D !
N DEAD
= N= TPP — FE
Sao + Ho—@-on EE
Rg 0
ZN =N Neer oun —o—@—o—cu =
Cr % 2 2 N\ ToL
Rg Rg 0 0)
NR3R, 8 NR;R,
Diethyl azodicarboxylate (2 mmol) is added dropwise via a syringe to a stirred solution of triphenylphosphine (2 mmol) in THF (5 mL) under an inert atmosphere and at room temperature. To this is added a solution of N,N’-6-
trimethyl-2-(4-hydroxymethylphenyl)imidazo(1.2-a]pyridine-3-acetamide (7,
Georges, P.; Allen, J. FR 25 81646 Al 861114; Chem. Abstr. 107, 5903 1; 2 mmol) and hydroquinone (2 mmol) in THF (1 mL). The resulting solution is stirred at RT and the progress of the reaction is followed by TLC. After the reaction occurs, ’ solvent is removed by evaporation under reduced pressure and the residue is purified by HPLC, giving the desired Formula [ compound [8, wherein R = 1 ,4-.
CeHs-s Ry =R,=R¢ = CH,]-
Example 7: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1, and the ligand, L, is the triazolobenzodiazepine nucleus of alprazolam linked through a C-1 methylene group to the linker X.
CICH, : “Fy ; 4g + HNCE—@cmp —
Rg: ~N a 9
Rg Ry i
C Rn — i
Sr Hy —NCH, —(&)— CH,N— cx, PN
C
Cl xs
N= Ry Ry _
Re: Rye o Q :
A mixture of 8-chloro-l-chloromethyl-6-phenyl-4H-s-triazolo{4,3- a][1,4)benzodiazepine (9, Hester, Jr., J.B.; et al., J] Med. Chem. 1980, 23, 392-402; 2 mmols), 1,4-diaminobutane (1 mmol), and KI (2 mmols) in THF (20 mL) is stirred under an inert atmosphere at RT. The progress of the reaction is monitored by TLC and when the reaction is complete, solvent is removed in vacuo. Water is mixed with the residue and is extracted with CH,Cl,. The organic extract is washed with half saturated brine, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula I compound [10, wherein R . = +(CH,),-; Ry'= C]; R," = R, = H] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 8: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1, and the ligand, L, is the triazolobenzodiazepine nucleus of alprazolam linked through a C-4 methylene, group to the linker X.
CH, Xl oo + BrcH,—@) CHB —
Ry =N DMF
R,- ; $ 11
CH, To NY
Deemed
Ry’ ~N N= Rg:
Ry Ro
C 12 ®
Sodium hydride (2 mmols) is added to a solution of 8-chloro-l-methyl-4- hydroxymethyl-6-phenyl-4H-s-triazolo[4.3-a][1,4]benzodiazepine (11, 2 mmols) in dry DMF (1 mL) stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 1,8-dibromooctane (1 mmol) in dry DMF (1 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirred, warmed and monitored for reaction by TLC. After the reaction occurred, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with CH,Cl, (3 x 20 mL) and the combined organic extracts are back-
washed with water. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula [ compound [12, wherein R = -(CH,),-; R;' = Cl; and R," = H] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC. :
Example 9: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1, one ligand, L,, is the benzodiazepine nucleus of imidazenil linked through the carboxamide group to the linker X and the second ligand, L,, is the benzodiazepine nucleus of imidazenil linked through a C-1 methylene group. . 10
Ry aq NaOH 1 + HNCH, —(g)—CH,0H —_— 13 _CBra
TPP
Pt
J TNC CH,Br 3
Ie & JL Sy —_—
Rg ==N DMF <8 14 0 R _N 0 | _ le) — HNCH, — CH,0-CH, _N
Ig / c HN z - 7 / C—NRR;
CJ " 8
Ry < SEE
Step 1. A mixture of 6-(2-bromophenyl)-8-fluoro-4H-imidazo[1,5-a][1.4] benzodiazepine-3-carbonyl chloride (1, E.P. 0 573 982 Al; 2 mmols), 3-- aminopropan-1-ol (2 mmol) and ice with 50% aqueous NaOH is mixed vigorously and progress of the reaction is followed by TLC. When the reaction is complete, the mixture is extracted with diethyl ether. The combined ether extracts are washed with water and with half-saturated brine, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated ) under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound [13, wherein R = -CH,-; R, = H; R; = F; and R,. = Br] is obtained by purification of the . crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 2. A solution, cooled to the temperature of an ice-water bath, containing compound 13 (2 mmols), triphenylphosphine (3 mmols), and carbon tetrabromide (4 mmols) in CH,Cl, (10 mL) is prepared and is stirred. The cooling bath is removed and the solution is stirred at room temperature. The progress of the reaction is followed by TLC and after the reaction occurs, the solution is diluted with additional CH,Cl,, washed with aqueous 5% NaHC O,, with water and with half-saturated brine. The organic layer is separated, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired compound (14, wherein R = -CH,-; R, = H; Ry =F; and R, = Br) is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
Step 3.
Sodium hydride (2 mmols) is added to a solution of 3 (2 mmols) in dry DMF (5 mL) stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 14 2 mmol) in dry DMF (1 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirred, warmed and monitored for reaction by TLC. After the reaction occurs, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with CH,CL, (3 x 20 mL) and the combined organic extracts wereback-washed with water. The organic layer is dried (Na,SQ,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula I compound [15, wherein R = -CH,- ; Ry =R, =H: R; =F; and R,' = Br] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 10: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1, one } ligand, L,, is the imidazopyridine nucleus of zolpidem linked through the carboxamide group to the linker X and a second ligand is the imidazopyridine nucleus linked through a C-4' methylene group. aq NaOH . 5 + HNCH, —&—cu,0u —_— 16 CBr,
R, TPP a Rs ~~ _N V, 7
R¢ NaH ——tee J
J Neu@cmB Top
Rj : 17 ¥
CO
Rg x oN 3. ,— OCH: NZ 0 wc, — ER : N Re
Ry 0]
Ry-N 18 “R,
Step 1.
A mixture of 5 (2 mmols), N-methylethanolamine (2 mmol) and ice with 50% aqueous NaOH is mixed vigorously and progress of the reaction is followed by TLC. When the reaction is complete, the mixture is extracted with diethyl ether.
The combined ether extracts are washed with water and with half-saturated brine, dried (Na,SQ,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound (16, wherein R = single bond; R, = R; = R,= CH,) is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 2. A solution, cooled to the temperature of an icc-water bath, containing compound 16 (2 mmols), triphenylphosphine (3 mmols), and carbon tetrabromide : (4 mmols) in CH,Cl, (10 mL) is prepared and is stirred. The cooling bath is removed and the solution is stirred at room temperature. The progress of the . reaction is followed by TLC and after the reaction occurs, the solution is diluted with additional CH,Cl,, washed with aqueous 5% NaHCO,, with water and with half-saturated brine. The organic layer is separated, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired compound (17, wherein R = single bond; R, = R; = Rg = CH,) is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
Step 3.
Sodium hydride (2 mmols) is added to a solution of 7, (2 mmols) in dry DMF (5 mL) stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 17 (2 mmols) in dry DMF (1 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirred, warmed and monitored for reaction by TLC. After the reaction occurs, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with CH,Cl, (3 x mL) and the combined organic extracts are back-washed with water. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula I compound (18, wherein R = single 20 bond; Ry =R, = R; = R, = CH,) is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 11: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1, one ligand, L,, is the triazolobenzodiazepine nucleus of alprazolam linked through a C-1 methylene group to the linker X and a second ligand, L,, is the triazolobenzodiazepine nucleus linked through a C-4 methylene group. )
Ry KI CBry 9 + HNCH,—{g)—CH,0H —
Ry
CH,N—CH, N,
Bec, iy
N—4 11
NaH
BSE ad
Ry’ =N DMF ~~ Rr ~
CH; _=N, : hig N - R
A 19 —_ —@)—cH N—CH; N, 4 CH,~0CH, : Fn
Rg =—=N : N / s . 3 @ 21 Rg ~N g Ry-
Step 1. A mixture of 8-chloro-l-hydroxymethyl-6-phenyl-4H-s-triazolo[4,3-a] 20 {1,4]benzodiazepine (9, 2 mmols), N-methyl-6-amino-1-hexanol (2 mmols), and KI (2 mmols) in THF (20 mL) is stirred under an inert atmosphere at RT. The progress of the reaction is monitored by TLC and when the reaction is complete, solvent is removed in vacuo. Watcr is mixed with the residue and is extracted with CH,Cl,.
The organic extract is washed with half saturated brine, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula
I compound [19, wherein R = -(CH,),-; R; = CI; R," = R, = H] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 2. A solution, cooled to the temperature of an ice-water bath, containing compound 19 (2 mmols), triphenylphosphine (3 mmols), and carbon tetrabromide (4 mmols) in CH,Cl, (10 mL) is prepared and is stirred. The cooling bath is removed and the solution is stirred at room temperature. The progress of the ) reaction is followed by TLC and after the reaction occurs, the solution is diluted with additional CH,Cl,, washed with aqueous 5% NaHCO, with water and with half-saturated brine. The organic layer is separated, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired compound [20, wherein wherein R= -(CH,),-; R{'= CI; R," = R, = H} is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
Step 3.
Sodium hydride (2 mmols) is added toa solution of 11, (2 mmols) in dry
DMF (5 mL) stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 20 (2 mmols) in dry DMF (1 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirred, warmed and monitored for reaction by TLC. After the reaction occurs, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with CH,C1, (3 x mL) and the combined organic extracts wereback-washed with water. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure : giving the crude product. The desired Formula I compound [21], wherein R = - 20 (CH,),-; Ry = CI; R," = R, = H] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 12: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1, one ligand, L, is the benzodiazepine nucleus of imidazenil linked through the carboxamide group to the linker X and a second ligand, L,, is the imidazopyridine nucleus of zolpidem linked through the carboxamide group. > Rs 0 N,H-xH,0 1 aq NaOH 2tl4-Xtly ] HNCH, CH,NPhal ———> 22 ———™ . v — cn: EtOH
Nooo
Rs TL 1
NN ~ Rg CH Cl, —————
Py 0 wna, —@—cry” ©
R; : | CL , u R : i NN = Rg = N 9 } A IN
C—HNCH,— CH,-N
N < 2 2 2,
Rg g =N 24 ’ Ry
Step 1.
A solution of 6-methyl-2-(4-mcthylphenyl)imidazo[1,2-]pyridine-3-acetyl chloride (5, 2 mmols) in CH,Cl, (5 mL) containing pyridine (0.5 mL) is stirred in an inert atmosphere. To this solution is added N-methyl-N'-phthalimidoyl-1,3- diaminopropane (2 mmols) and stirring is continued. The progress of the reaction is monitored by TLC and when the reaction is complete, water and additional CH,Cl, are added, the mixture is shaken, the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is further extracted with CH,Cl,. The combined organic cxtracts are dried (Na,SO,). filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound {22, wherein R (CH,)-; R, = R; = R, = CH,] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 2.
A mixture of 22 (2 mmols) and hydrazine hydrate (4 mmols) in absolute ethanol is warmed to 75°C and stirred under an inert atmosphere. The progress of ; the reaction is monitored by TLC and when the reaction is complete, the mixture is cooled in an ice bath and the solids collected by filtration. The solids are washed with ethanol and CH,C1,. The combined filtrates are mixed with cold half- saturated brine and extracted with CH,Cl,. The combined organic layers washed with water, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound [23, wherein R = -( CH,-;R,=R,=R, =
CH,] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 3. A solution of 6-(2-bromophenyl)-8-fluoro-4H-imidazo(1,5- a) 1,4]benzodiazepine-3-carbonyl chloride ( 1, 2 mmols) in CH,Cl, (§ mL) containing pyridine (0.5 mL) is stirred in an inert atmosphere. To this solution is added a solution of 23 (2 mmols) in CH,Cl, (5 mL) and stirring is continued. The progress of the reaction is monitored by TLC and when the reaction is complete, water and additional CH, Cl, are added, the mixture is shaken, the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is further extracted with CH,Cl,. The combined organic extracts are dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula I compound [23, wherein R =-(CH,)-; R, =R; =R, = CH,; Ry =F; and R,. = Br] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 13: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein pis 2,qis 1, one : ligand, L,, is the benzodiazepine nucleus of imidazenil linked through the carboxamide group to the linker X and a second ligand, L.. is the } imidazopyridine nucleus of zolpidem linked through a C-4' methylene group. ’ R, | aq NaOH CBr, 1 + HNCH, —(@)—CH,0H — 3B TT
A 0 7 pe ~ <Q Ry 26 9 2 Nar pa < NCH,~(E)—CH,-0-CH, <Q TL g R, 9 I Rg i © ) Ry 2 NRR,
Step 1.
A mixture of 6-(2-bromophenyl)-8-fluoro-4H-imidazo[1.5- aJ[1,4]benzodiazepine-3-carbonyt chloride (1, 2 mmols), 6-amino-1-hexanol (2 mmols) and ice with 50% aqueous NaOH is mixed vigorously and progress of the reaction is followed by TLC. When the reaction is complete, the mixture is extracted with diethyl ether. The combined ether extracts are washed with water and with half-saturated brine, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound 25, whercin R = -(CH,),-; R, =H; Ry =F; and R, = Br] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 2. ’ A solution, cooled to the temperature of an ice-water bath, containing compound 25 (2 mmols), triphenylphosphine (3 mmols), and carbon tetrabromide . (4 mmols) in CH,Cl, (10 mL) is prepared and is stirred. The cooling bath is removed and the solution is stirred at room temperature. The progress of the reaction is followed by TLC and after the reaction occurs, the solution is diluted with additional CH,Cl,, washed with aqueous 5% NaHCO,, with water and with half-saturated brine. The organic layer is separated, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired compound [26, wherein R = -(CH,),-; R, =H; R, =F; and R, = Br] is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
Step 3.
Sodium hydride (2 mmols) was added to a solution of 1.1 (2 mmols) in dry
DMF (5 mL) stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 26 (2 mmols) in dry DMF (1 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirred, warmed and monitored for reaction by TLC. After the reaction occurs, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with CH,Cl, (3 x mL) and the combined organic extracts are back-washed with water. The 20 organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula | compound [27, wherein R = - (CH,)4~; Ry =H; R;=R,=CH,; R;=F; and R,’ = Br} is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 14: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1, one ligand, L,, is the benzodiazepine nucleus of imidazenil linked through the carboxamide group to the linker X and a second ligand, L,, is the triazolobenzodiazepine nucleus of triazolam linked through a C-1 methylene ’ group. 1 + ENCE, —(@)—CrNphal CHCl pp NoFHD
Py EtOH
Fd
Lb 4 “NCH, B)—crNi, 9 soft : ——————i
Re =N THF
Sl
N Q R, [ _ — —CH. r )—C—HNCH, cra Ny : /
N: : 2D oS =N
Rg Ry: =—N ) :
Ry Roe
SEIS
Step 1.
A solution of 6-(2-bromophenyl)-8-fluoro-4H-imidazo[1,5-a][ 1,4] benzodiazepineaze-3-carbonyl chloride (1, 2 mmols) and N-phthaloyl-2,2'- oxybis(ethylamine) (2 mmols) in CH,Cl, (10 mL) and pyridine (0.5 mL) is stirred at RT and the progress of the reaction is followed by TLC. When the reaction is complete, water is added and the mixture is cxtracted with CH,Cl,. The combined organic extracts are washed with water and with half-saturated brine, dried (Na,SO0,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound (28, wherein R = -CH,OCH,-; R, = H; R, =F; R,'=
Br) is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 2.
A mixture of 28 (2 mmols) and hydrazine hydrate (4 mmols) in absolute ethanol is warmed to 75°C and stirred under an inert atmosphere. The progress of the reaction is monitored by TLC and when the reaction is complete, the mixture is : cooled in an ice bath and the solids collected by filtration. The solids are washed with ethanol and CH,Cl,. The combined filtrates arc mixed with cold half- saturated brine and extracted with CH,Cl,. The combined organic layers are washed with water, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound (29, wherein R = -CH,OCH,-; R, =H; R, =F; R,'= Br) is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 3.
A mixture of 9 (2 mmols), 29 (2 mmols), and KI (2 mmols) in THF (20 mL) is stirrred under an inert:atmosphere at RT. The progress of the reaction is monitored by TLC and when the reaction is complete, solvent is removed in vacuo.
Water is mixed with the residue and is extracted with CH,C1,. The organic extract is washed with half saturated brine, dried (Na,S04), filtercd and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula | compound (30, wherein R = -CH,0CH,-; R, =H; Ry = F; R,' = Br; R' = Cl; R." = H) is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 15: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1, one ligand, L,, is the benzodiazepine nucleus of imidazenil linked through the carboxamide group to the linker X and a second ligand, L.. is the triazolobenzodiazepine nucleus of triazolam linked through a C-4 methylene group. R, ! NaOH CBr, nN Q ~ >—C-
C] R, NaH : ————
Rg ~N DMF g Ry 32 : .N._-CH, £8 NT
Benoa
Ri - Nx
Ry =N i Ry
R,
J
Step 1. A mixture of 6-(2-bromophenyl)-8-fluoro-4H-imidazo[1,5- a][1.4]benzodiazepine-3-carbonyl chloride (1, 2 mmols), 2-(2-aminoethoxy)cthanol (2 mmols) and ice with 50% aqueous NaOH is mixed vigorously and progress of the reaction is followed by TLC. When the reaction is complete, the mixture is extracted with diethy] ether. The combined ether extracts are washed with water and with half saturated brine, dried (Na,S0O,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound (31, wherein R = -CH,0CH,-; R, =H; R; =F; R, = Br) is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 2.
A solution, cooled to the temperature of an ice-water bath, containing compound 31 (2 mmols), triphenylphosphine (3 mmols), and carbon tetrabromide (4 mmols) in CH,Cl, (10 mL) is prepared and is stirred. The cooling bath is removed and the solution is stirred at room temperature. The progress of the : reaction is followed by TLC and after the reaction occurs, the solution is diluted with additional CH, Cl,, washed with aqueous 5% NaHCO,, with water and with half-saturated brine. The organic layer is separated, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired compound (32, wherein R = -CH,OCH,-; R, = H; Ry =F; R,'= Br) is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
Step 3.
Sodium hydride (2 mmols) is added to a solution 11 (2 mmols) in dry DMF 3 mL) stirred under arl inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 32 (2 mmols) in dry DMF (1 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirred, warmed and monitored for reaction by TLC. After the reaction occurs, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with CH,Cl, (3 x mL) and the combined organic extracts are back-washed with water. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula I compound [33, wherein R = - 20 CH,OCH,-; R, = H; R =F; R,'= Br; R,, = CI; R," = H] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 16: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein pis 2, q is 1, one ligand, L,, is the benzodiazepine nucleus of imidazenil linked through a C-1 methylene group to the linker X and a second ligand, L,, is the imidazopyridine nucleus of zolpidem linked through the carboxamide group.
Ri NaOH CBr aq Na 4 5+ HNCH, —@)—CH,0H —_— 34 ——— s : z TPP
ZZ N=N, : rN Vs Rs 3
NaH ol NCH, —(@)— CHB: DMF 35 R,
R.
NZ 3
Rg "Nem, —@-cm-oc nN Q
Rs ig Lm
N—¢{ . 4g 36 Rg ~N 8
Step 1.
A mixture of 5 (2 mmols), N-methyl-6-aminohexanol (2 mmol) and ice with 50% aqueous NaOH is mixed vigorously and progress of the reaction is followed by TLC. When the reaction is complete, the mixture is extracted with diethyl ether.
The combined ether extracts are washed with water and with half-saturated brine, dried (Na,S04), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound (34, wherein R = -(CH,),-; R, = R= R,= CH) is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 2. A solution, cooled to the temperature of an ice-water bath, containing compound 34 (2 mmols), triphenylphosphine (3 mmols), and carbon tetrabromide (4 mmols) in CH,Cl, (10 m.L) is prepared and is stirred. The cooling bath is removed and the solution is stirred at room temperature. The progress of the reaction is followed by TLC and after the reaction occurs, the solution is diluted with additional CH,Cl,, washed with aqueous 5% NaHCO;, with water and with ’ half-saturated brine. The organic layer is separated, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired compound (35, wherein R = -(CH,),-; R; = R; = R; = CH,) is obtained by : purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
Step 3.
Sodium hydride (2 mmols) is added to a solution of 3 (2 mmols) in dry DMF (5 mL) stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 35 (2 mmol) in dry DMF (1 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirred, warmed and monitored for reaction By TLC. After the reaction occurs, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with CH,Cl, (3 x mL,) and the combined organic extracts are back-washed with water. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula [ compound [36, wherein R = - (CH,),-; R, =R, =H; R;=R;=R; = CH,; R, =F, and R, = Br] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the usc of HPLC. 20
Example 17: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1, one ligand, L,, is the imidazobenzodiazepine nucleus of imidazenil linked through a C-1 methylene group to the linker X and a second ligand, L,, is the imidazopyridine nucleus of zolpidem linked through a C-4' methylene group.
H : 3 + BrCH,—(&)~CH,0T™s Fa 37 = 8 2 2 TPP
BrCl COE: UN o Not
TT —_ 4 i
Rg =N 39
Ry ‘ 3
J Qo CHy-0“CH,—(&)—CH,-0CH, _N_ §
Rg geome
NR3R, 40 Rg =N
Ry:
Step 1. C
Sodium hydride (2 mmols) is added to a solution of 3 (2 mmols) in dry DMF (5 mL) stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 6-bromo-I- hexanol-O-TMS (2 mmol) in dry DMF (1 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirred, warmed and monitored for reaction by TLC. After the reaction occurs, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with
CH,CI, (3 x 20 mL) and the combined organic extracts are back-washed with water. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound (37, whercin R = - (CH,),-; R, =R, = H; Rg = F; and R,'= Br] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 2.
A solution of 37 in HOAc-H,O0 (4:1) (5 mL) is stirred under an inert atmosphere at room temperature. The reaction is followed by TLC and when ’ complete, is diluted with EtOAc and washed several times with water and dilute aq.
Na,CO;. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired alcohol [38, wherein R = - (CH,)s; R,=R, =H; Ry =F; and R,'= Br] is obtained by purification of the crude product by usc of HPLC.
Step 3.
A solution, cooled to the temperature of an ice-water bath, containing compound 38 (2 mmols), triphcnylphosphine (3 mmols), and carbon tetrabromide (4 mmols) in CH,Cl, (10 mL) is prepared and is stirred. The cooling bath is removed and the solution is stirred at room temperature. The progress of the reaction is followed by TLC and after the reaction occurs, the solution is diluted with additional CH,Cl,, washed with aqueous 5% NaHCO,, with water and with half-saturated brine. The organic layer is separated, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated'under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired bromide [39, wherein R = -(CH,),-; R, =R, = H; R, =F; and R,' = Br] is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
Step 4.
Sodium hydride (2 mmols) is added to a solution of 7 (2 mmols) in dry DMF (5 mL) stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 39 (2 mmols) in dry DMF (1 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirred, warmed and monitored for reaction by TLC. After the reaction occurs, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with CH,CI, (3 x 20 mL) and the combined organic extracts are back-washed with water. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula I compound [40, wherein R = - (CH,),-: R, =R, =H; R; = R, =R, = CH,; Ry =F; and R.. = Br] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 18: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1, one ligand, L,, is the imidazobenzodiazepine nucleus of imidazenil linked through a C-1 methylene group to the linker X and a second ligand, L,, is the triazolobenzodiazepine nucleus of alprazolam linked through a C-1 methylene group.
CCH N, :
T ARR BrCH,—g)— CH cE - N 2) BR HNCH, —(®)—CH,0TMs : : he NN
B
Rg =N KI 2 2A 5 Bu 2) "4 8 41 C] Ry «QO
A ; :N. CH, -NCH, CH,-0OCH; N 3 N, ni hg / C—NR{R, _ NaH - N ov ® LX
N= Rg Rg ~N
Rs- Ro ® . $
Step 1.
A mixture of 8-chloro-1-(3-chloropropy!)1-6-phenyl-4H-s-triazolo[4.3- a][1,4]benzodiazepine (41, Hester, Jr, J.B; et al., J. Med Chem. 1980, 23, 392- 402; 2 mmols), 3-aminopropanol-O-TMS (2 mmols). and KI (2 mmols) in THF (20 mL) is stirred under an inert atmosphere at RT. The progress of the reaction is monitored by TLC and when the reaction is complete, solvent is removed in vacuo.
Water is mixed with the residue and is extracted with CH,Cl,. The organic extract is washed with half saturated brine, dried (Na,SQO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound (42, wherein R = -(CH,)-; R¢'= CI; R," = Ry = H] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 2.
A solution of 42 in HOAc-H,O (4:1) (5 mL) is stirred under an inert atmosphere at room temperature. The reaction is followed by TLC and when complete, is diluted with EtOAc and washed several times with water and dilute aq.
Na,CO3. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under : reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired alcohol [43, wherein R = - (CH,)-; Rg’ = CL; R," = R, = H] is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
Step 3. A solution, cooled to the temperature of an ice-water bath, containing compound 43 (2 mmols), triphenylphosphine (3 mmols), and carbon tetrabromide (4 mmols) in CH,Cl, (10 mL) is prepared and is stirred. The cooling bath is removed and the solution is stirred at room temperature. The progress of the reaction is followed by TLC and after the reaction occurs, the solution is diluted with additional CH,Cl,, washed with aqueous 5% NaHCO,, with water and with half-saturated brine. The organic layer is separated, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired bromide [44, wherein R = -(CH,)-; Ry' = Cl; R," = R, = H] is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
Step 4.
Sodium hydride (2 mmols) is added to a solution of 3 (2 mmols) in dry DMF (5mL) stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 44 (2 mmols) in dry DMF (1 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirred, warmed and monitored for reaction by TLC. After the reaction occurs, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with CH,Cl1, (3 x 20 mL) and the combined organic extracts are back-washed with water. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula I compound [40, wherein R = - (CH,)-; R,=R,=R," =H; R; =F; Ry = Cl and R,'= Br] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 19: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1, one ligand, L , is the imidazobenzodiazepine nucleus of imidazenil linked through a C-1 methylene group to the linker X and a second ligand, L,, is the triazolobenzodiazepine nucleus of alprazolam linked through a C-4 methylene : group. : si @cnrocn yo
BrCH,—@—cr0TMs — as 1OAc CBr, T Lm
H,0 TPP C] .
Net as id
SYN
Y 0 x CHOCH,—E)—CH od ) — A 1 ’ ER Ry.
BO! » Re ®
N= R; :
Ras
Step 1. 'e
Sodium hydride (2 mmols) is added to a solution of 3, (2 mmols) in dry DMF (5 mL) stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 12-bromo-1- dodecanol-O-TMS (2 mmol) in dry DMF (1 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirred, warmed and monitored for reaction by TLC. After the reaction occurs, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with CH.Cl, (3 x 20 mL) and the combined organic extracts are back- washed with water. The organic layer is dried (Na,S0,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound [46. wherein R =-(CH.).-; R, =R, =H; R; =F; and R, = Br] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 2.
A solution of 46 in HOAc-H,0 (4:1) (5 mL) is stirred under an inert atmosphere at room temperature. The rcaction is followed by TLC and when complete, is diluted with EtOAc and washed several times with water and dilute aq.
Na,CO;. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired alcohol (47, wherein R = - (CH, R, =R, =H; Ry =F; and R,'= Br] is obtained by purification of the crude : product by use of HPLC.
Step 3. A solution, cooled to the temperature of an ice-water bath, containing compound 47 (2 mmols), triphenylphosphine (3 mmols), and carbon tetrabromide (4 mmols) in CH,Cl, (10 mL) is prepared and is stirred. The cooling bath is removed and the solution is stirred at room temperature. The progress of the reaction is followed by TLC and after reaction occurs, the solution is diluted with additional CH,Cl,, washed with aqueous 5% NaHCO,, with water and with half- saturated brine. The organic layer is separated, dried (Na,S0,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired bromide [48, wherein R = -(CH,),,; R, = R, = H; R, = F; and R,'= Br] is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
Step 4.
Sodium hydride (2 mmols) is added to a solution of 11 (2 mmols) in dry
DMF (5 mL) stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 48 (2 mmols) in dry DMF (1 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirred, warmed and monitored for reaction by TLC. After the reaction occurs, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with CH,C1, (3 x 20 mL) and the combined organic extracts are back-washed with water. The organic layer is dried (Na,S0,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula I compound [49, wherein R = - (CH; Ry =R, =R," =H; Ry =F; Ry = Cl and R,'= Br] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 20: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1, one ) ligand, L,, is the imidazopyridine nucleus of zolpidem linked through the carboxamide group to the linker X and a second ligand, L,, is the triazolobenzodiazepine nucleus of alprazolam linked through a C-1 methylene group. 5 _ N :
HNCH, —{(g)—CH,0H aq ~:OH CBr, ~ Lr LI § TTT TT ¢" “NCE®)—cHBr a R;
HOCH, Fi UN . "= 1. NaH as ? ars 2. re J NCEE) CHh OCH: “x
Ry Ry ; N~—4 4g 2] > 2 53 Rg Ry
J
Step 1.
A mixture of 5 (2 mmols), 4-(N-methylamino)-1-butanol (2 mmol) and ice with 50% aqueous NaOH is mixed vigorously and progress of the reaction is followed by TLC. When the reaction is complete, the mixture is extracted with diethyl ether. The combined ether extracts are washed with water and with half- saturated brine, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound (50, wherein R = -(CH,),-; R; =
R,=R, = CH,) is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of
HPLC.
Step 2. A solution, cooled to the temperature of an ice-water bath, containing compound 50 (2 mmols), triphenylphosphine (3 mmols), and carbon tetrabromide (4 mmols) in CH,CI, (10 mL) is prepared and is stirred. The cooling bath is removed and the solution is stirred at room temperature. The progress of the reaction is followed by TLC and after the reaction occurs, the solution is diluted with additional CH,Cl,, washed with aqueous 5% NaHCO,, with water and with ) half-saturated brine. The organic layer is separated, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired compound (51, wherein R = -(CH,),-; R, = R; = R, = CHj,) is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
Step 3.
Sodium hydride (2 mmols) is added to a solution of 52, (Hester, Jr., J.B; et al., J. Med. Chem. 1980, 23, 392-402; 2 mmols) in dry DMF (5 mL) stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 51 (2 mmol) in dry DMF (1 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirred, warmed and monitored for reaction by TLC.
After the reaction occurs, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with CH,C1, (3 x 20 mL) and the combined organic extracts are back-washed with water. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduccd pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula I compound [53, wherein R = -(CH,);-; R, = R, =R, = CH,; R=
Cl; and R," = H) is obtained by chromatography of the crude product using HPLC.
Example 21: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein pis 2, q is 1, one ligand, L,, is the imidazopyridine nucleus of zolpidem linked through the carboxamide group to the linker X and a second ligand, L,, is the triazolobenzodiazepine nucleus of alprazolam linked through a C-4 methylene group.
NaOH + HNCH—@)—CHNHCbz =) 54 _CBu _ !
R, TPP
L50-
R
NY S
Rs : 55 O NCEE) CH,
R; . 5
Na CH
NT 5
N NaH roca JL a
N= R; ’ ® i Rs x N N. CH
Re NOY 56 A o NN. ; Io! Ner- Qed [)
Ry - H © N= Rg 57. 7 Re ®
Step 1.
A mixture of 5 (2 mmols), N-methyl-N'-Cbz-1,6-diaminohexane (2 mmols) and ice with 50% aqueous NaOH is mixed vigorously and progress of the reaction is followed by TLC. When the reaction is complete, the mixture is extracted with diethyl ether. The combined ether extracts are washed with water and with half- saturated brine, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound [54, wherein R = -(CH,),-; R,=
R; =R, = CH,] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of
HPLC.
Step 2.
A solution of 54 in ethyl acetate (10 mL) is hydrogenated at atmospheric pressure in the presence of 10% palladium-on-carbon (100 mg) until TLC evidence showed that reaction is complete. The mixture is filtered through Celite and the filter pad is washed thoroughly with ethyl acetate. The combined filtrates are concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired compound [55, wherein R = -(CH,),-; R, =R, = R, = CH,] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 3.
A solution of 55 (1 mmol), 8-chloro-l-methyl-6-phenyl-4H-s-triazolo[4,3- a][1,4]benzodiazepine-4-acetic acid (56; Hester, Jr., ].B.; et al, J. Med. Chem. 1980, 23, 643-7; 1 mmol) and 4-dimethylaminopyridine (10 mg) in CH,C1, (5 mL) is prepared under argon in a flask equipped with magnetic stirrer and a drying tube.
To this solution is added dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (solid, 2.2 mmol). The progress of the reaction is followed by TLC and after the reaction occurs, the reaction solution is quenched in water, aqueous sodium bicarbonate is added and the aqueous mixture is extracted with methylene chloride. The organic layer is washed with aqueous Na,CO, and with H,0, dried (Na,S0,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired Formula I compound [57, wherein R = -(CH,),-; R, = R; =R, = CH,; Ry’ = Cl; and R," = H] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 22: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein pis 2, q is 1, one ligand, L,, is the imidazopyridine nucleus of zolpidem linked through the C-4' methylene group to the linker X and a second ligand, L,, is the triazolobenzodiazepine nucleus of alprazolam linked through a C-1 methylene group.
7 + BrCH,—(@)—CHOTMS ve 58 Sr
N
2 Lr C cio ci @-con ing > - 0 59
NR;R,
JQ Cry 0 Ci, —@)—CH,0— CH, N,
Rg SN 0s i T N
C7 =
NR;R, 60 gos 9
Step 1. :
Sodium hydride (2 mmols) is added to a solution of 7, (2 mmols) in dry DMF (5 mL stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 3-bromo-1-- propano}-O-TMS (2 mmols) in dry DMF (1 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirred, warmed and monitored for reaction by TLC. After the reaction occurs, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with CH,Cl, (3 x 20 mL) and the combined organic extracts are back- washed with water. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound [58, wherein R = -(CH,)-; R; = R, = R, = CH,] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 2.
A solution of 58 in HOAc-H,0O (4:1) (5 mL) is stirred under an inert atmosphere at room temperature. The reaction is followed by TLC and when complete, is diluted with EtOAc and washed several times with water and dilute aq.
Na,CO,. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired alcohol [59, wherein R = . (CH,)-; Ry =R, =R¢ = CH,] is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
Step 3.
Sodium hydride (2 mmols) is added to a solution of 59, (2 mmols) in dry.
DMF (5 mL stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 9 (2 mmols) in dry DMT (1 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirrcd, warmed and monitored for reaction by TLC. After the reaction occurs, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with CH,Cl, (3 x 20 mL) and the combined organic extracts are back-washed with water. The organic layer is dried (Na,SQ,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product; The desired Formula I compound [60, wherein R = - (CH,)-; Ry =R,=R, =CHj; R;, = Cl; and R, = H] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 23: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, gis 1. one ligand, L,, is the imidazopyridine nucleus of zolpidem linked through the C-4' methylene group to the linker X and a second ligand, L.,, is the triazolobenzodiazepine nucleus of alprazolam linked through a C-4 methylene . group.
T+ BrCH, —(®)—CH.0TMs Natl 61004, CBre
DMF HOO TPP
S
11
ANN .
Rg DMF - 0 63 .
NR;R, . N CH,
NY
A \=N. YN N
NZ CH,0CH, ~&)—c1,-och,
Rg / N= Ag
O id 64 Ry-
NR;3R, }
Step 1.
Sodium hydride (2 mmols) is added to a solution of 7, (2 mmols) in dry DMF (5 mL) stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 7-bromo-1- heptanol-O-TMS (2 mmols) in dry DMF (1 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirred, warmed and monitored for reaction by TLC. After the reaction occurs, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with CH, Cl, (3 x 20 mL) and the combined organic extracts are back- washed with water. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound [61, wherein R = -(CH,),- and R; = R, = R, = CH,} is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 2.
A solution of 61 in HOAc-H,0 (4:1) (5 mL) is stirred under an inert atmosphere at room temperature. The reaction is followed by TLC and when complete, is diluted with EtOAc and washed several times with water and dilute aq.
Na,CO,. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under - reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired alcohol [62, wherein R = -
S (CH,)s-; R, =R, = R, = CH,] is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC. :
Step 3. A solution, cooled to the temperature of an ice-water bath, containing compound 62 (2 mmols), triphenylphosphine (3 mmols), and carbon tetrabromide (4 mmols) in CH,Cl, (10 mL) is prepared and is stirred. The cooling bath is removed and the solution is stirred at room temperature. The progress of the reaction is followed by TLC and after the reaction occurs, the solution is diluted with additional CH,Cl,; washed with aqueous 5% NaHCO,, with water and with half-saturated brine. The organic layer is separated, dried (Na,S0O,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product, The desired compound {63, wherein R = -(CH,);-; R, = R, =R, = CH,] is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
Step 4.
Sodium hydride (2 mmols) is added to a solution of 11, (2 mmols) in dry
DMEF (5mL) stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 63 (2 mmols) in dry DMF (1 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirred, warmed and monitored for reaction by TLC. After the reaction occurs, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with CH,Cl, (3 x 20 mL) and the combined organic extracts are back-washed with water. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula I compound [64, wherein R = - (CH,)s-; R, = R,= Rs = CHj; Ry, = Cl; and R," = H] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 24: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1, one ligand, L,, is the benzodiazepine nucleus of imidazenil linked through the carboxamide group to the linker X and a second ligand, L,, is 4- aminobutanoic acid linked through a C-3 oxygen atom. -
R, ) aq NaOH CBr, 1 + HNCH, — cron > 6 — nN 9 = OH 7 C~ f = NCH, {g)—CaBr 1. N;CH,CHCH,COOE: colt ” — —_———— 0 N DMF
R, 66 4 2. HyPd-C
Fd
NA NCH, ~@)-cm—o
C R H;NCH,CHCH,COQEt
Ry ~N g Ry 68
Step 1.
A mixture of 6-(2-bromophenyl)-8-fluoro-4H-imidazo(1,5- a](1,4]benzodiazepine-3-carbony! chloride (1) (2 mmol), 6-amino-l-hexanol (2 mmols), and ice with 50% aqueous NaOH is mixed vigorously and progress of the reaction is followed by TLC. When the reaction is complete, the mixture 1s extracted with diethyl ether. The combined ether extracts are washed with water and with half-saturated brine, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound [65, wherein R = -(CH,);; R, =H; Ry = F; and R,, = Br} is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 2.
A solution, cooled to the temperature of an ice-water bath, containing compound 65 (2 mmols), triphenylphosphine (3 mmols), and carbon tetrabromide (4 mmols) in CH,C1, (10 mL) is prepared and is stirred. The cooling bath is removed and the solution is stirred at room temperature. The progress of the ) reaction is followed by TLC and after the reaction occurs, the solution is diluted with additional CH,Cl,, washed with aqueous 5% NaHCO,, with water and with half-saturated brine. The organic layer is separated. dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired compound (66, wherein R = -(CH,),-; R, = H; R, = F; and R,’ = Br] is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
Step 3.
Sodium hydride (2 mmols) is added to a solution of 4-azido-3- hydroxybutanoic acid; ethyl ester (Kobayashi, K.; eral., JP 08119935) (2 mmols) in dry DMF (5 m L) stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 66 (2 mmol) in dry DMF (1 mL) and the resulting mixture is stirred, warmed and monitored for progress of the reaction by TLC. After the reaction occurs, the mixture is quenched with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL). The mixture is extracted with CH,Cl, (3 x 20 mL) and the combined organic extracts are back- washed with water. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound [67, wherein R = -(CH,),-; R, =H; R; = F; and R,'= Br} is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 4.
A solution of 67 (2 mmols) in ethanol (10 mL) is hydrogenated over 3% palladium on carbon. When the reaction is complete. as determined by TLC. the reaction mixture is filtered through Celite, the filter pad is washed with ethanol and the combined filtrates are concentrated under reduced pressure. The desired compound [68, wherein R = -(CH,),-; R, = H; Ry = F; and R,' = Br] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 25: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1, and one ligand, L,, is the imidazopyridine nucleus of zolpidem linked through the carboxamide group to the linker X and the second ligand is 4-aminobutanoic acid linked via a 3-aminomethy! group. ) ’ 5+ hers, — coon Hl, LOH
UN Py H,0/MeOH :
CbzNHCHCH,CH,COOMe Hy/Pd-C &§ NCH, {)—CcooH Thee 1 2s
Ry DMAP 70 ANN ah 0 Nek, (—comm-cx,
Rs NH,CHCH,CH,COOMe
Step 1. 72
A solution of 5 (2 mmols) in CH,Cl, (5 mL) containing pyridine (0.5 mL was stirred in an inert atmosphere. To this solution is added 4-aminobutanoic acid, methyl ester (2 mmols) and stirring is continued. The progress of the reaction is monitored by TLC and when the reaction is complete, water and additional CH,Cl, are added, the mixture is shaken, the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is further extracted with CH,Cl,. The combined organic extracts are dried (Na,SO,). filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired Formula I compound [69, wherein R = -(CH,)-; Ry = R; =R,=CH,] is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 2.
A solution of 69 (2 mmols)and lithium hydroxide (100 mmols) in methanol (9 mL) and water (3 mL) is stirrcd at room temperature. The reaction is followed by thin layer chromatography. After the reaction occurs, the pH of the solution 1s adjusted to 7 by the addition of dilute aq. hydrochloric acid. The solvent is removed by lyophilization and the dry, crude product (70) is used directly in the next reaction. : Step 3. A solution containing the crude 70 (1 mmol) and 5-amino-4-(N benzyloxycarbonyl)aminopentanoic acid, methyl ester (1 mmol) in methylene chloride (20 mL) is prepared under argon in a flask equipped with magnetic stirrer and drying tube. To this solution is added dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (solid, 1.1 mmols). The course of the reaction is followed by thin laycr chromatography while stirring at room temperature. After the reaction occurs, the reaction solution is diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with water and with aqueous Na,CO.. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired compound (71) is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
IS Step 4.
Ammonium formate (96 mg, 1.5 mmol) and 10% Pd/C (50 mg) are added to a solution of 71 in methanol (2 mL) and THF (1 mL). The mixture is stirred at room temperature. The reaction is monitored by TLC and after the reaction occurs, the mixture is filtered through Celite and rinsed with ethyl acetate. The filtrate is washed successively with aq. NaHCO, and with half-saturated brine, then filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired
Formula I compound {72, wherein R = -(CH,),-; R; = H; R; = R, = CH,] is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
Example 26: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1. and one ligand, L,, is the triazolobenzodiazepine nucleus of alprazolam linked through a C-1 methylene group to the linker X and the second ligand is 4- aminobutanoic acid linked via a 2-amino group.
BOCNHCH. OR >CH,CHCOOE DIP] 2 t + BCH, —~(@)—Cr,0mMs EA cH, ~—@)—Cr,0mMs 73 DMF NH
BOCNHCH,CH,CHCOOE: 74 . (BOC).0
EN cH, — Cron HOAc CH, —()—CH,0TMS
NBOC H,0 NBOC
BOCNHCH,CH,CHCOOEt 76 BOCNHCH,CH,CHCOOE: 75
CBr,
TPP
CH, SD CHBr NH,CH,CH,CH; Na
NBOC N~4
BOCNHCH,CH,CHCOOE: 77 4
Rg ~N 1. | KITHE ° Ry : —_— 79 2. | TFA 78 — CH, -NHCH,CH,CH
GH SS 2 2 ZA Fu
NH N—4
NH,CH,CH,CHCOOEt $ = go Ry ~N <i
Step 1.
A solution of 4-(N-BOC-amino)-2-aminobutanoic acid, ethyl ester (73.
Blandon, C.M.; et. al., Tetrahedron Lett. 1989, 30, 1401-4; 2 mmol) and 4-bromo- 1-butanol- O-TMS (1 mmol), and diisopropylethylamine (0.2 mL) in DMF (3 mL) is stirred and warmed under an inert atmosphere. The progress of the reaction is followed by TLC and when reaction is complete, the solution is poured into aqueous 5% NaHCO, and the aqueous mixture is extracted with methylene chloride. The organic extract solution is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired compound, 74, is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
Step 2.
A solution of BOC-anhydride (5 mmol) and triethylamine (0.1 mL) in
CH,C1, (5 mL) is stirred under an inert atmosphere. To this is added a solution of 74 (2 mmol) in CH,Cl, (2 mL) and the resulting solution is stirred. The reaction is followed by TLC and when complete, is quenched by the addition of aqueous
Na,CO,. The mixture is extracted with CH,Cl, the organic extracts are washed with half-saturated saline, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired product, 75, is obtained by purification of the crude product by usc of HPLC
Step 3.
A solution 75 in HOAc-H,O (4:1) (5 mL) is stirred under an inert atmosphere at room temperature. The reaction is followed by TLC and when complete, is diluted with EtOAc and washed several times with water and dilute aq. Na,CO,.
The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,). filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired compound, 70, is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
Step 4. A solution, cooled to the temperature of an ice-water bath, containing compound 76 (2 mmols), triphenylphosphine (3 mmols), and carbon tetrabromide (4 mmols) in CH,Cl, (10 mL) is prepared and is stirred. The cooling bath is removed and the solution is stirred at room temperature. The progress of the reaction is followed by TLC and after the reaction occurs, the solution is diluted with additional CH, Cl, washed with aqueous 5% NaHCO3, with water and with half-saturated brine. The organic layer is separated, dried (Na,SQO)), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The destred bromo } compound, 77, is obtained by purification of the crude product by use of HPLC.
Step S. A mixture of 8-chloro-I-(3-aminopropyl)-6-phenyl-4H-s-triazolo {4,3-] [1,4]benzodiazepine (78, Hester, Jr., J.D.; et al., J. Med. Chen. 1980, 23. 392-402; 2 mmols), 77 (2 mmols), and KI (2 mmols) in THF (20 mL) is stirrred under an inert atmosphere at RT. The progress of the reaction is monitored by TLC and when the reaction is complete, solvent is removed in vacuo. Water is mixed with the residue and is extracted with CH,Cl,. The organic extract is washed with half saturated brine, dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product. The desired compound, 79, 1s obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC.
Step 6. A solution of 79 and trifluoroacetic acid (3 mL) in CH,Cl, (5 mL) is stirred at room temperature. The progress of the reaction is followed by TLC. After the reaction occurs, more CH,Cl, is added and the solution is washed with aqueous
Na,CO, and with H,O. The organic layer is dried (Na,SO,), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude product. The desired Formula
I compound (80, where R is -(CH,),-; R," = H; Ry’ = Cl] is obtained by purification ofthe crude product with the use of HPLC.
Example 27: Preparation of a Formula I compound wherein p is 2, q is 1, one ligand, L,, is the benzodiazepine nucleus of imidazenil linked through the carboxamide group to the linker X and a second ligand, L.. is the triazolobenzodiazepine nucleus of triazolam linked through a C-1 methylene group.
N,Q = CN—Br 1+ HN Br CHCl C] R,
Py or 81
Ry. . CH; g
HC=CCH,NCH, v No rePh,
N~4 Cul 81 + i C > TEN & 0 R Ry . “) Ry i @eeniony, N g a “5
Ry Ry =N $ ) 83 ) Ry
Step 1. ; -
A solution of 6-(2-bromophenyl)-8-fluoro-4H-imidazo[1,5- a][1,4]benzodiazepine-3-carbonyl chloride (1, 2 mmols) and a- bromophenethylamine (2 mmols) in CH,Cl, (10 mL) and pyridine (0.5 mL) is stirred at RT and the progress of the reaction is followed by TLC. When the reaction is complete, water is added and the mixture is extracted with CH,Cl,. The combined organic extracts are washed with water and with half-saturated brine, dried (Na,S04), filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure giving the crude product.
The desired compound (81, wherein R = -CH.CH,CH,-; R, =H: R; =F; R, = Br) is obtained by purification of the crude product with use of HPLC.
Step 2.
A solution of 81 (1 mmol), 8-chloro-1-{(N-mecthyl-N-propargylamino)methyl]- 6-phenyl-4H-s-triazolo{4,3-a][I,4]benzodiazepine (82. Hester. Jr., J.B.; et al., J. Med
Chem. 1980, 23, 392-402: 1 mmol), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(O) (150 mg), and triethylamine (0.3 mL) in toluene (10 mL) is stirred with copper (I) iodide (20 mg). The mixture is stirred at 100=C and the progress of the reaction is followed by thin layer chromatography (TLC). After the reaction occurs, the mixture is cooled, filtered, and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give the crude reaction product.
The desired compound (structure 83, where R = -CH,CH,C,H,-; R, ’ =R," =H; Ry =F; R, = Br; Ry’ = Cl) is obtained by purification of the crude product with the use of HPLC. )
Claims (47)
1. A multibinding compound comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently : attached to one or more linkers wherein each of said ligands independently comprises an agonist, partial agonist, inverse agonist, partial inverse agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors; and pharmaceutically-acceptable salts thereof.
2. A multibinding compound of formula I: (L),(X), : wherein each L is independently a ligand which is an agonist, partial agonist, inverse agonist, partial inverse agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors; each X is independently a linker; p is an integer of from 2 to 10; and ¢ is an integer of from 1 to 20; and pharmaceutically-acceptable salts thereof.
3. The multibinding compound of Claim 2 wherein ¢ is less than p.
4, The multibinding compound of Claim 3 wherein each ligand is independently selected from a compound of formula A-F: Co N - = n Z, N O qe ge R, N / 035] LX R R =N _ V, 5 8 x Rg N Rg uN ot 2 AR Xx Z Cc A B CH, N CH, Fu hg N ad Rs N~4 " ~N—7 $ )CHZ, Rg 0] R =N Rg ~N i" NR,R, Ra- $@ R;- : g E F wherein: Z,; are, independently, an atom or group of atoms serving to connect the ligand, L, to the linker, X; and wherein R,, and R, are, independently, H, alkyl substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl or aryl ’ Ry, are, independently, H, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, or halo : Rg, Ry, Ry and R,. are, independently, H, substituted alkyl, aryl, halo or nitro; and pharmaceutically-acceptable salts thereof.
5. The multibinding compound of Claim 4 wherein the ligand is an agonist of the GABA, receptor.
6. The multibinding compound of Claim 4 wherein the ligand is a partial agonist of the GABA, receptor.
7. The multibinding compound of Claim 4 wherein the ligand is an antagonist of the GABA, receptor.
8. The multibinding compound of Claim 4 wherein each linker independently has the formula: -X-ZAY?-2),,-Y -Z-X- wherein m is an integer of from 0 to 20, X* at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -S-, -NR-, -C(0)-, -C(0)0-, -C(O)NR-, -C(S), -C(S)O-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below;
Z is at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylenc, cycloalkenylene, : substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; Y* and Y" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of -C(O)NR’-, -NR’C(0O)-, -NR’C(O)NR’-, -C(=NR’)-NR’-, -NR’-C(=NR’)-, -NR’-C(0)-0-, -N=C(X’)-NR '-, -P(O)(OR’)-O-, -S(0),CR’R"-, -S(0),-NR’-, -S-S- and a covalent bond; where n is 0, 1 or 2; and R, R’ and R" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen. alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
9. A multibinding compound of formula II: L—-X-L I wherein each L’ is independently a ligand comprising an agonist, partial agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors and X’ is a linker; and pharmmaceutically-acceptable salts thereof.
10. The multibinding compound of Claim 9 wherein each ligand is independently selected from the group consisting of compounds of formulae A-F
N. @ Zo N_ § Cc CRE, ~N-7 5 Ry =N Rg —=N Rg o Ry Ry: J J .C A B Z-CH\ _N CH; _N, FN TN ~ N N—% N Jevs ese sat Rg = [o} Rg: =N Ry =N Ro Ry ns e e D E F Z,, are, independently, an atom or group of atoms serving to connect the ligand, L, to the linker, X; and wherein R,, and R, are, independently, H, alkyl or cycloalkyl; R,¢ are, independently, H, alkyl, or halo; R,, Ry, R; and R.. are, independently, H, halo or nitro; and pharmaceutically- acceptable salts thereof.
11. The multibinding compound of Claim 10 wherein X’ has the formula: X2-Z-(Y*-2),-Y-Z-X3- wherein m is an integer of from O to 20; X* at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -O-,-S-, -NR-, -C(0)-, -C(0)O-, -C(O)NR-, -C(S), -C(S)O-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below; Z is at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene,
substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; Y* and Y® at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting ) of -C(O)NR’-, -NR’C(O)-, -NR’C(O)NR +, -C(=NR’)-NR’-, -NR’-C(=NR’)-, -NR’-C(0)-0O-, -N=C(X*)-NR’-, -P(O)(OR’)-O-, -S(0),CR’R"-, -S(0),-NR’-, -S-S- and a covalent bond; where n is 0, 1 or 2; and R, R’ and R” at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl. substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl. substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
12. A multibinding compound of claim 11, wherein the ligand 1s an agonist, partial agonist, inverse agonist or partial inverse agonist of the GABA, receptor.
13. The multibinding compound of Claim 12 wherein X" has the formula: SXP-Z-(Y*-Z),-YP-Z-XP- wherein m is an integer of from 0 to 20; X* at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -S-, -NR-, -C(0)-, -C(0)O-, -C(O)NR-, -C(S), -C(S)O-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below; Z is at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene. substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; Y* and Y® at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of -C(O)NR’-, -NR’C(O)-, -NR’C(O)NR’-, -C(=NR’)-NR’-,
-NR’-C(=NR’)-, -NR’-C(0)-O-, -N=C(X")-NR’-, -P(O)(OR)-O-, : -S(0),CR’R"-, -§(0),-NR’-, -S-S- and a covalent bond; where nis 0, 1 or 2; and R, R" and R" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
14. A multibinding compound of claim 11, wherein the ligand is an agonist or partial agonist of the GABAb receptor.
15. The multibinding compound of Claim 14 wherein X” has the formula: CL XZA(YZ) YX wherein m is an integer of from 0 to 20; X* at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -O-, -$-, -NR-, -C(0)-, -C(0)0-, -C(O)NR-, -C(S), -C(S)O-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below; Z is at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cvicoalkylene, alkenylene. substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynviene, cvcloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; Y* and Y® at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of -C(O)NR’-, -NR’C(O)-, -NR’C(O)NR'-, -C(=NR’)-NR’-, -NR’-C(=NR’)-, -NR’-C(0)-0-, -N=C(X")-NR’-, -P(O)(OR’)-O-. -5(0),CR’R"-, -§(0),-NR’-, -S-S- and a covalent bond; where nis 0, | or 2; and R, R’ and R" at each separate occurrence are sclected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cvcloalkyl, alkenyl,
substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic. : 16. A multibinding compound of claim 11 wherein the ligand is an antagonist of the GABA, receptor.
17. The multibinding compound of Claim 4 wherein X" has the formula: -X-Z-(Y?-2),-Y -Z-X- wherein m is an integer of from 0 to 20; X* at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -S-, -NR-, -C(O)-, iC(0)O-, -C(O)NR-, C(S), -C(S)0-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below; . Z is at each separate occurrence is sclccted from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene. substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; Y*® and Y" at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of -C(O)NR’-, -NR’C(O)-, -NR’C(O)NR’-, -C(=NR')-NR’-, -NR’-C(=NR’})-, -NR’-C(0)-0-, -N=C(X*)-NR’-, -P(O}OR’)-0O-, -5(0),CR’R"-, -5(0),-NR’-, -S-S- and a covalent bond; where n is 0, 1 or 2; and R, R' and R” at cach scparate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen. alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl. substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl. alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
18. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and an effective amount of a multibinding compound comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers wherein each of said ) ligands independently comprises an agonist, partial agonist. inverse agonist. partial inverse agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors: and pharmaceutically- . acceptable salts thereof.
19. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and an effective amount of a multibinding compound of formula I; (L),(X), wherein each L is independently a ligand comprising an agonist. partial agonist. inverse agonist, partial inverse agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors: each X is independently a linker: p is an integer of from 2 to 10: and ¢ is an integer of from 1 to 20; and pharmaceuticallyv-acceptablc salts thereof. '
20. The pharmaceutical composition of Claim 19 wherein ¢ is less than p.
21. The pharmaceutical composition of Claim 20 wherein each ligand is independently selected from a compound of formula A-F: : 0 fo) Z N u N ~ —NRR N—4 N ~T J 0 J ~ Ry RA. Rx : Z J i B A CH, N
Z.CHy< WN. “ON TY x T 4 N “= 7 Nn z = Rs / R ~~ —=N a UN / Rg =N 8 Re Rg 0 Rar Zr 7 - ; NR:Rq §. = D F E wherein Z,, are, independently, an atom or group of atoms serving to connect the ligand, L, to the linker, X; and wherein ‘ R,, and Ry are, independently, H, alkyl or cycloalkyl; R,, are, independently, H, alkyl, or halo; R;, Ry, R, and R,. are, independently, H, halo or nitro; and pharmaceutically- acceptable salts thercof.
22. The pharmaceutical composition of Claim 21 wherein the ligand is an agonist or partial agonist of the GABA, receptor.
23. The pharmaceutical composition of Claim 21 wherein the ligand is an agonist of the GABA, receptor.
24, The pharmaceutical composition of Claim 21 wherein the ligand is an antagonist of the GABA, receptor.
25. The pharmaceutical composition of Claim 21 wherein each linker independently has the formula: -X-Z-(Y*-2),-YP-Z-X°- wherein m is an integer of from 0 to 20; X* at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0O-, -§-, -NR-, -C(0O)-, -C(0)O-, -C(O)NR-, -C(S), -C(S)O-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below: Z 1s at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylicoalkylenc, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene. cycloalkenylene,
substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent ’ bond; Y* and Y” at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting . of -C(O)NR’-, -NR’C(0)-, -NR’C(O)NR’-, -C(=NR’)-NR’-, -NR’-C(=NR’)-, -NR’-C(0)-0-, -N=C(X*)-NR’-, -P(O)(OR’)-O-, -S(0),CR’R™-, -§(0),-NR’-, -S-S- and a covalent bond; where nis 0, 1 or 2; and R,R’ and R"” at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
26. A pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and an effective amount of a multibinding compound of formula I: L'—X—L’ II wherein each L’ is independently a ligand comprising an agonist, partial agonist, inverse agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors; and X is a linker; and pharmaceutically-acceptable salts thereof.
27. The pharmaceutical composition of Claim 26 wherein each ligand is independently selected from the group compounds of formulas A-F: NB 24 Cz, he — 0 se fge : $ R, g = A Cc B
Z.- SEC {a (8) Ry: =N R, —N 274 po Cl N _] x E F
28. The pharmaceutical composition of Claim 27 wherein X' has the formula: -X*Z-(Y?-2Z),-Y’-Z-X*- wherein m is an integer of from 0 to 20; X* at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0-, -§-, -NR-, -C(0)-, -C(0)0-, -C(O)NR-, -C(S), -C(S)O-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below; Z is at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenvlene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; Y* and Y* at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of -C(O)NR’-, -NR’C(0)-, -NR’C(O)NR'-, -C(=NR’)-NR’-, -NR’-C(=NR’)-. -NR’-C(0)-0-, -N=C(X*)-NR’-, -P(O)(OR")-O-, -$(0),CR’R"-, -5(0),-NR-, -S-S- and a covalent bond; where nis 0, 1 or 2; and
R, R’ and R” at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of . hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted : alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic. Bb)
29. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and an effective amount of a multibinding compound of formulas
A-F.
30. The pharmaceutical composition of Claim 29 wherein X" has the formula: ; XP-ZA(Y2-2),-Y -Z-X wherein ; [IB m is an integer of from O to 20; X? at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -O-, -§-, -NR-, -C(0)-, -C(0)O-, -C(O)NR-, -C(S), -C(S)O-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below; Z is at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene. alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylcne, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; Y* and Y® at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of -C(O)NR’-, -NR’C(O)-, -NR'C(O)NR’-, -C(=NR")-NR'-, -NR’-C(=NR’)-, -NR’-C(0)-O-, -N=C(X")-NR’-, -P(O)(OR")-O-, -S(0),CR’R"-, -§(0),-NR’-, -S-S- and a covalent bond; where n1s 0, 1 or 2; and R, R' and R” at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl.
substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic. : 31. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaccutically acceptable carrier and an effective amount of a multibinding compound as described in claim 1, wherein the ligand is an agonist, partial agonist, inverse agonist or partial inverse agonist of the GABA, receptor.
32. The pharmaceutical composition of Claim 31 wherein X” has the formula: -X-Z-(Y*-Z),-Y°-Z-X*- wherein i : m is an integer of from 0 to 20; X* at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of -0O-, -§-, -NR-, -C(O)-, -C(0)0-, -C(O)NR-, -C(S), -C(S)O-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below; Z is at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenylene, substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; Y* and Y?® at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of -C(O)NR’-, -NR’C(0)-, -NR’C(O)NR’-, -C(=NR’)-NR’-, -NR’-C(=NR’)-, -NR’-C(0)-0-, -N=C(X")-NR’-, -P(O)(OR")-O-, -S(0),CR’R"-, -§(0),-NR’-, -S-S- and a covalent bond; where n is 0. 1 or 2: and R,R" and R” at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
33. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and an effective amount of a multibinding compound of claim 1, wherein the ligand is an agonist of the GABAb receptor.
S 34. The pharmaceutical composition of Claim 33 wherein X" has the formula: -X-ZA(Y?-Z),-YP-Z-X3 wherein m is an integer of from 0 to 20; X* at each separate occurrence is sclected from the group consisting of -O-, -§-, -NR-, -C(0)-, -C(0)O-, -C(O)NR-, -C(S), -C(S)O-, -C(S)NR- or a covalent bond where R is as defined below; Z is at each separate occurrence is selected from the group consisting of alkylene, substituted alkylene, cycloalkylene, substituted cylcoalkylene, alkenvlene. substituted alkenylene, alkynylene, substituted alkynylene, cycloalkenylene, substituted cycloalkenylene, arylene, heteroarylene, heterocyclene, or a covalent bond; Y® and Y® at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of -C(O)NR’-, -NR’C(0)-. -NR’C(O)NR’-, -C(=NR’)-NR’-, -NR’-C(=NR’)-, -NR'-C(0)-O-, -N=C(X*)-NR’-, -P(O)(OR")-O-, -S(0),CR’R"-, -§(0),-NR’-, -S-S- and a covalent bond; where nis 0, 1 or 2; and R, R’ and R” at each separate occurrence are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic. 169 AMENDED SHEET
35. Use of a multibinding compound comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers wherein each of said ligands independently comprises an agonist, partial agonist, partial inverse agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for treating neurological disorders mediated by the GABA receptors in a patient.
36. Use of a therapeutically-effective amount of a multibinding compound having anticonvulsant or anxiolytic activity and comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers wherein each of said ligands independently comprises an agonist, partial agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors, or a pharmaceutically- acceptable salt thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for enhancing GABA-induced chloride currents at the GABA receptor/ionophore complex in a mammal.
37. Use of a muitibinding compound having anticonvulsant or anxiolytic activity and comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers wherein each of said ligands independently comprises an agonist, partial agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for treating convulsant seizures in a mammal.
38. Use of a multibinding compound having sedative or hypnotic activity and comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers wherein each of said ligands independently comprises an agonist, partial agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for producing sedation or hypnosis in a mammal.
39. Use of a therapeutically-effective amount of a multibinding compound having amnesia producing activity and comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers wherein each of said ligands independently comprises AMENDED SHEET an agonist, partial agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors, or a pharmaceutically- acceptable salt thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for producing retrograde amnesia in a mammal.
40. Use of a multibinding compound having anticonvulsant or anxiolytic activity and comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers wherein each of said ligands independently comprises an agonist, partial agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for treating anxiety in a mammal.
41. Use of a multibinding compound comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers wherein each of said ligands independently comprises an agonist, partial agonist or antagonist of the GABAp receptors, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for treating emesis.
42. A method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties which method comprises: a) identifying a ligand or a mixture of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality; (b) identifying a library of linkers wherein each linker in said library comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand; (©) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands identified in (a). AMENDED SHEET v 171 with the library of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands; and (d) assaying the multimeric ligand compounds produced in the library prepared in (c) above to identify multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties.
43. A method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties which method comprises: (a) identifying a library of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality; (b) identifying a linker or mixture of linkers wherein each linker comprises at least two functionai‘groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand; (c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the library of ligands identified in (a) with the linker or mixture of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands; and (d) assaying the multimeric ligand compounds produced in the library prepared in (c) above to identify multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties.
44. The method according to Claim 42 or 43 wherein the preparation of the multimeric ligand compound library is achieved by either the sequential or concurrent combination of the two or more stoichiometric equivalents of the ligands identified in (a) with the linkers identified in (b).
45. The method according to Claim 44 wherein the multimeric ligand compounds comprising the multimeric ligand compound library are dimeric. AMENDED SHEET
46. The method according to Claim 45 wherein the dimeric ligand compounds comprising the dimeric ligand compound library are heteromeric.
47. The method according to Claim 46 wherein the heteromeric ligand compound library is prepared by sequential addition of a first and second ligand.
48. The method according to Claim 44 or 45 wherein, prior to procedure (d), each member of the multimeric ligand compound library is isolated from the library.
49. The method according to Claim 46 wherein each member of the library is isolated by preparative liquid chromatography mass spectrometry (LCMS). © 50. The method according to Claim 42 or 43 wherein the linker or linkers employed are selected from the group comprising flexible linkers, rigid linkers. hydrophobic linkers, hydrophilic linkers, linkers of different geometry, acidic linkers, basic linkers, linkers of different polarization and/or polarizability and amphiphilic linkers.
St. The method according to Claim 50 wherein the linkers comprise linkers of different chain length and/or having different complementary reactive groups.
52. The method according to Claim 51 wherein the linkers are selected to have different linker lengths ranging from about 2 to 100A.
53. The method according to Claim 42 or 43 wherein the ligand or mixture of ligands is selected to have reactive functionality at different sites on said ligands. AMENDED SHEE"
) 46. The method according to Claim 45 wherein the dimeric ligand compounds comprising the dimeric ligand compound library are heteromeric. ’ 47. The method according to Claim 46 wherein the heteromeric ligand S compound library is prepared by sequential addition of a first and second ligand.
48. The method according to Claim 44 or 45 wherein, prior to procedure (d), each member of the multimeric ligand compound library is isolated from the library.
49. The method according to Claim 46 wherein each member of the library is isolated by preparative liquid chromatography mass spectrometry (LCMS).
50. The method according to Claim 42 or 43 wherein the linker or linkers employed are selected from the group comprising flexible linkers, rigid linkers. hydrophobic linkers, hydrophilic linkers, linkers of different geometry, acidic linkers, basic linkers, linkers of different polarization and/or polarizability and amphiphilic linkers.
51. The method according to Claim 50 wherein the linkers comprise linkers of different chain length and/or having different complementary reactive groups.
52. The method according to Claim 51 wherein the linkers are selected to have different linker lengths ranging from about 2 to 100A.
53. The method according to Claim 42 or 43 wherein the ligand or mixture of ligands is selected to have reactive functionality at different sites on said ligands.
54. The method according to Claim 53 wherein said reactive functionality - is selected from the group consisting of carboxylic acids, carboxylic acid halides, carboxy! esters, amines, halides, pseudohalides, isocyanates, vinyl unsaturation, ketones, aldehydes, thiols, alcohols, anhydrides, boronates, and precursors thereof wherein the reactive functionality on the ligand is selected to be complementary to at least one of the reactive groups on the linker so that a covalent linkage can be: formed between the linker and the ligand.
55. The method according to Claim 42 or 43 wherein the multimeric ligand compound library comprises homomeric ligand compounds.
56. The method according to Claim 42 or 43 wherein the multimeric ligand compound libraty comprises heteromeric ligand compounds.
57. A library of multimeric ligand compounds which may possess multivalent properties which library is prepared by the method comprising: (a) identifying a ligand or a mixture of ligands wherein each ligand contains at least one reactive functionality; (b) identifying a library of linkers wherein each linker in said library comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at least one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand; and (c) preparing a multimeric ligand compound library by combining at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands identified in (a) with the library of linkers identified in (b) under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands.
58. A library of multimeric ligand compounds which may possess multivalent properties which library is prepared by the method comprising:
wherein the reactive functionality on the ligand is selected to be complementary to at least one of the reactive groups on the linker so thata covalent linkage can be formed between the linker and the ligand.
64. The library according to Claim 38 or 59 wherein the multimeric ligand compound library comprises homomeric ligand compounds.
65. The library according to Claim 57 or 58 wherein the multimeric ligand compound library comprises heteromeric ligand compounds.
66. An iterative method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties which method comprises: (a) preparing a first collection or iteration of multimeric compounds which is prepared by contacting at least two stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands which target a receptor with a linker or mixture of linkers wherein said ligand or mixture of ligands comprises at least one reactive functionality and said linker or mixture of linkers comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at Icast one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand wherein said contacting is conducted under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands; ®) assaying said first collection or iteration of multimeric compounds (0 assess which if any of said multimeric compounds possess multibinding properties; (©) repeating the process of (a) and (b) above until at least one multimeric compound is found to possess multibinding properties; (d) evaluating what molecular constraints imparted or are consistent with imparting multibinding properties to the multimeric compound or compounds found in the first iteration recited in (a)- (¢) above; AMENDED SHEET wherein the reactive functionality on the ligand is selected to be complementary to at least one of the reactive groups on the linker so that a covalent linkage can be formed between the linker and the ligand.
64. The library according to Claim 58 or 59 wherein thc multimeric ligand compound library comprises homomeric ligand compounds.
65. The library according to Claim 57 or 58 wherein the multimeric ligand compound library comprises heteromeric ligand compounds.
66. An itcrative method for identifying multimeric ligand compounds possessing multibinding properties which method comprises: (a) preparing a first collection or iteration of multimeric compounds which is prepared by contacting at least twa stoichiometric equivalents of the ligand or mixture of ligands which target a receptor with a linker or mixture of linkers wherein said ligand or mixture of ligands comprises at least onc reactive functionality and said linker or mixture of linkers comprises at least two functional groups having complementary reactivity to at lcast one of the reactive functional groups of the ligand wherein said contacting is conducted under conditions wherein the complementary functional groups react to form a covalent linkage between said linker and at least two of said ligands; (b) assaying said first collection or iteration of multimeric compounds to assess which if any of said multimeric compounds possess multibinding propertics; (c) repeating the process of (a) and (b) above until at least one multimeric compound is found to possess multibinding properties; (d) evaluating what molecular constraints imparted or are consistent with imparting multibinding properties to the multimeric compound or compounds found in the first iteration recited in (a)- (c) above;
-
. more linkers wherein each of said ligands independently comprises an agonist, partial agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, wherein the compound is present in the composition in an amount effective for preventing or ameliorating convuisant seizures or anxiety in the mammal to which it is administered, and said method comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of said substance or composition to said mammal.
71. A substance or composition for use in a method for treating convulsant seizures in a mammal, said substance or composition comprising a multibinding compound comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers wherein each of said ligands independently comprises an agonist, partial agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, wherein the compound is present in the composition in an amount effective for preventing or ameliorating convulsant seizures or anxiety in the mammal to which it is administered, and said method comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of said substance or composition to the mammal.
72. A substance or composition for use in a method for producing sedation or hypnosis in a mammal, said substance or composition comprising a multibinding compound comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers wherein each of said ligands independently comprises an agonist, partial agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, wherein the compound is present in said composition in an amount effective for preventing or ameliorating convulsant seizures or anxiety in the mammal to which it is administered, and said method comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of said substance or composition to the mammal.
73. A substance or composition for use in a method for producing retrograde amnesia in a mammal, said substance or composition comprising a multibinding compound comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers wherein each of said ligands independently comprises an agonist, partial AMENDED SHEET agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, wherein the compound is present in said composition in an amount effective for preventing or ameliorating convulsant seizures or anxiety in the mammal to which it is administered, and said method comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of said substance or composition to the mammal.
74. A substance or composition for use in a method for treating anxiety in a mammal, said substance or composition comprising a multibinding compound comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers wherein each of said ligands independently comprises an agonist, partial agonist or antagonist of the GABA receptors, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, wherein the compound is present in said composition in an amount effective for preventing or ameliorating convulsant seizures or anxiety in the mammal to which it is administered, and said method comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of said substance or composition to the mammal.
75. A substance or composition for use in a method for treating emesis, said substance or composition comprising a muitibinding compound comprising from 2 to 10 ligands covalently attached to one or more linkers wherein each of said ligands independently comprises an agonist, partial agonist or antagonist of the GABAp receptors, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable salt thereof, wherein the compound is present in said composition in an amount effective for preventing or ameliorating emesis in the mammal to which it is administered, and said method comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of said substance or composition to a mammal suffering from or susceptible to emesis.
76. A compound according to Claim 1, Claim 2 or Claim 9, substantially as herein described and illustrated.
77. A composition according to Claim 18, Claim 19, Claim 26, Claim 29, Claim 31 or Claim 33, substantially as herein described and illustrated. AMENDED SHEET
[ KY J
78. Use according to any one of Claims 35 to 41, substantially as herein described and illustrated.
79. A method according to Claim 42, Claim 43 or Claim 66, substantially as herein described and illustrated.
80. A library according to Claim 57 or Claim 58, substantially as herein described and illustrated.
81. A substance or composition for use in a method of treatment according to J any one of Claims 69 to 75, substantially as herein described and illustrated. /
82. A new compound, a new composition, new use of a multibinding compound as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 17, a new method for identifying compounds, a new library, or a substance or composition for a new use in a method of treatment, substantially as herein described. AMENDED SHEET
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US8846698P | 1998-06-08 | 1998-06-08 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
ZA200004085B true ZA200004085B (en) | 2001-11-12 |
Family
ID=27733450
Family Applications (7)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
ZA200003475A ZA200003475B (en) | 1998-06-08 | 2000-07-11 | Muscarinic receptor antagonists. |
ZA200004084A ZA200004084B (en) | 1998-06-08 | 2000-08-10 | Bradykinin antagonists. |
ZA200004083A ZA200004083B (en) | 1998-06-08 | 2000-08-10 | H1-histamine receptor antagonists. |
ZA200004085A ZA200004085B (en) | 1998-06-08 | 2000-08-10 | Multivalent agonists, partial agonists and antagonists of the GABA receptors. |
ZA200004087A ZA200004087B (en) | 1998-06-08 | 2000-08-10 | Novel therapeutic agents that modulate alpha-1A adrenergic receptors. |
ZA200004561A ZA200004561B (en) | 1998-06-08 | 2000-08-31 | β 2-adrenergic receptor agonists. |
ZA200004565A ZA200004565B (en) | 1998-06-08 | 2000-08-31 | β2-Adrenergic receptor agonists. |
Family Applications Before (3)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
ZA200003475A ZA200003475B (en) | 1998-06-08 | 2000-07-11 | Muscarinic receptor antagonists. |
ZA200004084A ZA200004084B (en) | 1998-06-08 | 2000-08-10 | Bradykinin antagonists. |
ZA200004083A ZA200004083B (en) | 1998-06-08 | 2000-08-10 | H1-histamine receptor antagonists. |
Family Applications After (3)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
ZA200004087A ZA200004087B (en) | 1998-06-08 | 2000-08-10 | Novel therapeutic agents that modulate alpha-1A adrenergic receptors. |
ZA200004561A ZA200004561B (en) | 1998-06-08 | 2000-08-31 | β 2-adrenergic receptor agonists. |
ZA200004565A ZA200004565B (en) | 1998-06-08 | 2000-08-31 | β2-Adrenergic receptor agonists. |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
ZA (7) | ZA200003475B (en) |
-
2000
- 2000-07-11 ZA ZA200003475A patent/ZA200003475B/en unknown
- 2000-08-10 ZA ZA200004084A patent/ZA200004084B/en unknown
- 2000-08-10 ZA ZA200004083A patent/ZA200004083B/en unknown
- 2000-08-10 ZA ZA200004085A patent/ZA200004085B/en unknown
- 2000-08-10 ZA ZA200004087A patent/ZA200004087B/en unknown
- 2000-08-31 ZA ZA200004561A patent/ZA200004561B/en unknown
- 2000-08-31 ZA ZA200004565A patent/ZA200004565B/en unknown
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
ZA200004565B (en) | 2002-02-27 |
ZA200004083B (en) | 2002-01-30 |
ZA200004087B (en) | 2001-11-13 |
ZA200004561B (en) | 2001-11-30 |
ZA200003475B (en) | 2001-10-11 |
ZA200004084B (en) | 2001-11-19 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
WO1999063933A9 (en) | Multivalent agonists, partial agonists and antagonists of the gaba receptors | |
WO1999063988A9 (en) | Inhibitors of nitric oxide synthase | |
US6593497B1 (en) | β2-adrenergic receptor agonists | |
US6420560B1 (en) | H1—histamine receptor antagonists | |
AU4335299A (en) | Bradykinin antagonists | |
ZA200004085B (en) | Multivalent agonists, partial agonists and antagonists of the GABA receptors. | |
WO1999064046A9 (en) | Multivalent agonists, partial agonists, inverse agonists and antagonists of the 5-ht3 receptors | |
AU750366B2 (en) | Beta2-adrenergic receptor agonists |